bfd/
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
4 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012
5 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 @syncodeindex ky cp
7 @c man begin INCLUDE
8 @include configdoc.texi
9 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
10 @include bfdver.texi
11 @c man end
12
13 @c @smallbook
14
15 @macro gcctabopt{body}
16 @code{\body\}
17 @end macro
18
19 @c man begin NAME
20 @ifset man
21 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
22 @set UsesEnvVars
23 @set GENERIC
24 @set ARM
25 @set C6X
26 @set H8300
27 @set HPPA
28 @set I960
29 @set M68HC11
30 @set M68K
31 @set MMIX
32 @set MSP430
33 @set POWERPC
34 @set POWERPC64
35 @set Renesas
36 @set SPU
37 @set TICOFF
38 @set WIN32
39 @set XTENSA
40 @end ifset
41 @c man end
42
43 @ifnottex
44 @dircategory Software development
45 @direntry
46 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
47 @end direntry
48 @end ifnottex
49
50 @copying
51 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54 @end ifset
55 version @value{VERSION}.
56
57 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
58 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
96 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97 Software Foundation, Inc.
98
99 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
100 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
101 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
104 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
105 @c man end
106
107 @end titlepage
108 @end iftex
109 @contents
110 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
112 @ifnottex
113 @node Top
114 @top LD
115 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118 @end ifset
119 version @value{VERSION}.
120
121 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
122 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
124
125 @menu
126 * Overview:: Overview
127 * Invocation:: Invocation
128 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129 @ifset GENERIC
130 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131 @end ifset
132 @ifclear GENERIC
133 @ifset H8300
134 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135 @end ifset
136 @ifset Renesas
137 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
138 @end ifset
139 @ifset I960
140 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141 @end ifset
142 @ifset ARM
143 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144 @end ifset
145 @ifset HPPA
146 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147 @end ifset
148 @ifset M68HC11
149 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150 @end ifset
151 @ifset M68K
152 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153 @end ifset
154 @ifset POWERPC
155 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156 @end ifset
157 @ifset POWERPC64
158 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159 @end ifset
160 @ifset SPU
161 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162 @end ifset
163 @ifset TICOFF
164 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165 @end ifset
166 @ifset WIN32
167 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168 @end ifset
169 @ifset XTENSA
170 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171 @end ifset
172 @end ifclear
173 @ifclear SingleFormat
174 * BFD:: BFD
175 @end ifclear
176 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
180 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
181 * LD Index:: LD Index
182 @end menu
183 @end ifnottex
184
185 @node Overview
186 @chapter Overview
187
188 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189 @cindex what is this?
190
191 @ifset man
192 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
193 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
194 @c man end
195
196 @c man begin SEEALSO
197 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199 @file{ld}.
200 @c man end
201 @end ifset
202
203 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
205 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
206 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
207 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
208
209 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
210 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
213 @ifset man
214 @c For the man only
215 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
216 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
218 @end ifset
219
220 @ifclear SingleFormat
221 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
223 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226 @end ifclear
227
228 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
231 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
232 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
234 @c man end
235
236 @node Invocation
237 @chapter Invocation
238
239 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
241 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
242 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243 you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
245 @c man end
246
247 @ifset UsesEnvVars
248 @menu
249 * Options:: Command Line Options
250 * Environment:: Environment Variables
251 @end menu
252
253 @node Options
254 @section Command Line Options
255 @end ifset
256
257 @cindex command line
258 @cindex options
259
260 @c man begin OPTIONS
261
262 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264 @cindex standard Unix system
265 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
266 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267 link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269 @smallexample
270 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271 @end smallexample
272
273 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
274 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
278 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
279 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
284 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286 noted in the descriptions below.
287
288 @cindex object files
289 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292 an option and its argument.
293
294 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298 message @samp{No input files}.
299
300 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
301 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
306 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
311
312 For options whose names are a single letter,
313 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315 option that requires them.
316
317 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
318 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
319 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
320 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
321 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
322 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324 output.
325
326 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331 accepted.
332
333 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
335 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336 compiler driver) like this:
337
338 @smallexample
339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
340 @end smallexample
341
342 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
343 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350 @smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352 @end smallexample
353
354 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355 linker:
356
357 @table @gcctabopt
358 @include at-file.texi
359
360 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
361 @item -a @var{keyword}
362 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
368 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377 interface.
378
379 @ifset I960
380 @cindex architectures
381 @kindex -A @var{arch}
382 @item -A @var{architecture}
383 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
385 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
387 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
389 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
390 family}, for details.
391
392 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
393 other architecture families.
394 @end ifset
395
396 @ifclear SingleFormat
397 @cindex binary input format
398 @kindex -b @var{format}
399 @kindex --format=@var{format}
400 @cindex input format
401 @cindex input format
402 @item -b @var{input-format}
403 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
404 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
406 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
407 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
408 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
409 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
410 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414 @xref{BFD}.
415
416 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418 linking object files of different formats), by including
419 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
420 particular format.
421
422 The default format is taken from the environment variable
423 @code{GNUTARGET}.
424 @ifset UsesEnvVars
425 @xref{Environment}.
426 @end ifset
427 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
428 @code{TARGET};
429 @ifclear man
430 see @ref{Format Commands}.
431 @end ifclear
432 @end ifclear
433
434 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @cindex compatibility, MRI
437 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
439 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
440 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
441 @ifclear man
442 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443 @end ifclear
444 @ifset man
445 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446 @end ifset
447 Introduce MRI script files with
448 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
449 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
451 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453 @cindex common allocation
454 @kindex -d
455 @kindex -dc
456 @kindex -dp
457 @item -d
458 @itemx -dc
459 @itemx -dp
460 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
466 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
477 @cindex entry point, from command line
478 @kindex -e @var{entry}
479 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
480 @item -e @var{entry}
481 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
490 @kindex --exclude-libs
491 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
493 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
494 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499 be treated as hidden.
500
501 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512 regardless of this option.
513
514 @cindex dynamic symbol table
515 @kindex -E
516 @kindex --export-dynamic
517 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
518 @item -E
519 @itemx --export-dynamic
520 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
521 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
530
531 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534 linking the program itself.
535
536 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
537 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
538 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
539
540 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
544 @ifclear SingleFormat
545 @cindex big-endian objects
546 @cindex endianness
547 @kindex -EB
548 @item -EB
549 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551 @cindex little-endian objects
552 @kindex -EL
553 @item -EL
554 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555 @end ifclear
556
557 @kindex -f @var{name}
558 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559 @item -f @var{name}
560 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
561 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574 machine specific performance.
575
576 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
579 @kindex -F @var{name}
580 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
581 @item -F @var{name}
582 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
583 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594 @var{name}.
595
596 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
597 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
598 object files.
599 @ifclear SingleFormat
600 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
601 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
602 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
603 environment variable.
604 @end ifclear
605 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606 creating an ELF shared object.
607
608 @cindex finalization function
609 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
610 @item -fini=@var{name}
611 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614 the function to call.
615
616 @kindex -g
617 @item -g
618 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
620 @kindex -G @var{value}
621 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
622 @cindex object size
623 @item -G @var{value}
624 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627 MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630 @cindex runtime library name
631 @kindex -h @var{name}
632 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
633 @item -h @var{name}
634 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
635 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641 @kindex -i
642 @cindex incremental link
643 @item -i
644 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
646 @cindex initialization function
647 @kindex -init=@var{name}
648 @item -init=@var{name}
649 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652 function to call.
653
654 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
655 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
656 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
657 @item -l @var{namespec}
658 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
662 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
663 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
664
665 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
666 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672 @var{filename}.
673
674 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
681 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
682 archives multiple times.
683
684 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686 @ifset GENERIC
687 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
688 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
689 behaviour of the AIX linker.
690 @end ifset
691
692 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
693 @kindex -L @var{dir}
694 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
695 @item -L @var{searchdir}
696 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
697 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
699 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
702 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
703 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705 option is specified.
706
707 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
710 @ifset UsesEnvVars
711 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
712 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
713 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714 @end ifset
715
716 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720 @cindex emulation
721 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
722 @item -m @var{emulation}
723 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730 configured.
731
732 @cindex link map
733 @kindex -M
734 @kindex --print-map
735 @item -M
736 @itemx --print-map
737 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738 information about the link, including the following:
739
740 @itemize @bullet
741 @item
742 Where object files are mapped into memory.
743 @item
744 How common symbols are allocated.
745 @item
746 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
748 @item
749 The values assigned to symbols.
750
751 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757 linker script containing:
758
759 @smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763 @end smallexample
764
765 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766 option is used:
767
768 @smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772 @end smallexample
773
774 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775 scripts.
776 @end itemize
777
778 @kindex -n
779 @cindex read-only text
780 @cindex NMAGIC
781 @kindex --nmagic
782 @item -n
783 @itemx --nmagic
784 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
787
788 @kindex -N
789 @kindex --omagic
790 @cindex read/write from cmd line
791 @cindex OMAGIC
792 @item -N
793 @itemx --omagic
794 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
795 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
797 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799 specification published by Microsoft.
800
801 @kindex --no-omagic
802 @cindex OMAGIC
803 @item --no-omagic
804 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
808
809 @kindex -o @var{output}
810 @kindex --output=@var{output}
811 @cindex naming the output file
812 @item -o @var{output}
813 @itemx --output=@var{output}
814 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
815 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818 @kindex -O @var{level}
819 @cindex generating optimized output
820 @item -O @var{level}
821 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
822 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
823 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
828
829 @kindex -q
830 @kindex --emit-relocs
831 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
832 @item -q
833 @itemx --emit-relocs
834 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
835 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837 in larger executables.
838
839 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
841 @kindex --force-dynamic
842 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843 @item --force-dynamic
844 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845 to VxWorks targets.
846
847 @cindex partial link
848 @cindex relocatable output
849 @kindex -r
850 @kindex --relocatable
851 @item -r
852 @itemx --relocatable
853 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
854 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
855 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857 @code{OMAGIC}.
858 @c ; see @option{-N}.
859 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
863 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867 with input files in other formats at all.
868
869 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871 @kindex -R @var{file}
872 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873 @cindex symbol-only input
874 @item -R @var{filename}
875 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879 programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
881 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
882 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
883 the @option{-rpath} option.
884
885 @kindex -s
886 @kindex --strip-all
887 @cindex strip all symbols
888 @item -s
889 @itemx --strip-all
890 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892 @kindex -S
893 @kindex --strip-debug
894 @cindex strip debugger symbols
895 @item -S
896 @itemx --strip-debug
897 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899 @kindex -t
900 @kindex --trace
901 @cindex input files, displaying
902 @item -t
903 @itemx --trace
904 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
905
906 @kindex -T @var{script}
907 @kindex --script=@var{script}
908 @cindex script files
909 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
910 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
912 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
913 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
914 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917 options accumulate.
918
919 @kindex -dT @var{script}
920 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921 @cindex script files
922 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933 @samp{gcc}).
934
935 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
936 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937 @cindex undefined symbol
938 @item -u @var{symbol}
939 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946 @kindex -Ur
947 @cindex constructors
948 @item -Ur
949 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
951 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
952 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956 @samp{-r} for the others.
957
958 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966 in a linker script.
967
968 @kindex -v
969 @kindex -V
970 @kindex --version
971 @cindex version
972 @item -v
973 @itemx --version
974 @itemx -V
975 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
976 lists the supported emulations.
977
978 @kindex -x
979 @kindex --discard-all
980 @cindex deleting local symbols
981 @item -x
982 @itemx --discard-all
983 Delete all local symbols.
984
985 @kindex -X
986 @kindex --discard-locals
987 @cindex local symbols, deleting
988 @item -X
989 @itemx --discard-locals
990 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
993
994 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
995 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996 @cindex symbol tracing
997 @item -y @var{symbol}
998 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001 to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1007 @item -Y @var{path}
1008 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009 for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012 @item -z @var{keyword}
1013 The recognized keywords are:
1014 @table @samp
1015
1016 @item combreloc
1017 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018 lookup caching possible.
1019
1020 @item defs
1021 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1022 shared libraries are still allowed.
1023
1024 @item execstack
1025 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
1027 @item initfirst
1028 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033 objects.
1034
1035 @item interpose
1036 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037 but the primary executable.
1038
1039 @item lazy
1040 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043 Lazy binding is the default.
1044
1045 @item loadfltr
1046 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047 runtime.
1048
1049 @item muldefs
1050 Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052 @item nocombreloc
1053 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055 @item nocopyreloc
1056 Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058 @item nodefaultlib
1059 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060 ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062 @item nodelete
1063 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065 @item nodlopen
1066 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068 @item nodump
1069 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
1071 @item noexecstack
1072 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074 @item norelro
1075 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
1077 @item now
1078 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082 first called.
1083
1084 @item origin
1085 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
1087 @item relro
1088 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
1090 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
1096 @end table
1097
1098 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1099
1100 @kindex -(
1101 @cindex groups of archives
1102 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1103 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1104 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1105 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1106
1107 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1108 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1109 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1110 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1111 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1112 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1113 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1114 resolved.
1115
1116 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1117 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1118 more archives.
1119
1120 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1123 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1124 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1125 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1126 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1127 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1128 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1129 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1130 restore the old behaviour.
1131
1132 @kindex --as-needed
1133 @kindex --no-as-needed
1134 @item --as-needed
1135 @itemx --no-as-needed
1136 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1137 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1138 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1139 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1140 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1141 emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1142 from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1143 DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1144 undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1145 @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1146
1147 @kindex --add-needed
1148 @kindex --no-add-needed
1149 @item --add-needed
1150 @itemx --no-add-needed
1151 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1152 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1153 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1154 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1155
1156 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1157 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1158 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1159
1160 @kindex -Bdynamic
1161 @kindex -dy
1162 @kindex -call_shared
1163 @item -Bdynamic
1164 @itemx -dy
1165 @itemx -call_shared
1166 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1167 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1168 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1169 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1170 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1171 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1172
1173 @kindex -Bgroup
1174 @item -Bgroup
1175 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1176 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1177 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1178 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1179 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1180
1181 @kindex -Bstatic
1182 @kindex -dn
1183 @kindex -non_shared
1184 @kindex -static
1185 @item -Bstatic
1186 @itemx -dn
1187 @itemx -non_shared
1188 @itemx -static
1189 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1190 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1191 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1192 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1193 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1194 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1195 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1196 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1197 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1198 libraries.
1199
1200 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1201 @item -Bsymbolic
1202 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1203 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1204 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1205 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1206 platforms which support shared libraries.
1207
1208 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1209 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1210 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1211 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1212 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1213 libraries.
1214
1215 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1218 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1219 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1220 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1221 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1222 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1223 which support shared libraries.
1224
1225 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1226 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1227
1228 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1229 @item --dynamic-list-data
1230 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1231
1232 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1235 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1236
1237 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1240
1241 @kindex --check-sections
1242 @kindex --no-check-sections
1243 @item --check-sections
1244 @itemx --no-check-sections
1245 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1246 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1247 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1248 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1249 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1250 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1251 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1252 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1253 option.
1254
1255 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1258 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1259 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1260 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1261 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1262 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1263 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1264 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1265 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1266 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1267
1268 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1269 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1270 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1271 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1272 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1273 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1274 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1275 symbols.
1276
1277 @cindex cross reference table
1278 @kindex --cref
1279 @item --cref
1280 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1281 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1282 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1283
1284 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1285 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1286 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1287 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1288 definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1289
1290 @cindex common allocation
1291 @kindex --no-define-common
1292 @item --no-define-common
1293 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1294 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1295 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1296
1297 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1298 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1299 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1300 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1301 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1302 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1303 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1304 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1305 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1306 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1307
1308 @cindex symbols, from command line
1309 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1310 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1311 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1312 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1313 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1314 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1315 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1316 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1317 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1318 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1319 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1320 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1321 @var{expression}.
1322
1323 @cindex demangling, from command line
1324 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1325 @kindex --no-demangle
1326 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1327 @itemx --no-demangle
1328 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1329 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1330 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1331 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1332 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1333 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1334 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1335 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1336 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1337
1338 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1339 @kindex -I@var{file}
1340 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1341 @item -I@var{file}
1342 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1343 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1344 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1345 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1346 doing.
1347
1348 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1349 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1350 @item --fatal-warnings
1351 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1352 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1353 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1354
1355 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1356 @item --force-exe-suffix
1357 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1358
1359 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1360 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1361 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1362 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1363 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1364 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1365
1366 @kindex --gc-sections
1367 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1368 @cindex garbage collection
1369 @item --gc-sections
1370 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1371 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1372 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1373 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1374 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1375
1376 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1377 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1378 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1379 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1380 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1381 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1382 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1383 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1384 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1385
1386 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1387 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1388 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1389 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1390
1391 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1392 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1393 @cindex garbage collection
1394 @item --print-gc-sections
1395 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1396 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1397 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1398 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1399 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1400 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1401 line.
1402
1403 @kindex --print-output-format
1404 @cindex output format
1405 @item --print-output-format
1406 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1407 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1408 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1409
1410 @cindex help
1411 @cindex usage
1412 @kindex --help
1413 @item --help
1414 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1415
1416 @kindex --target-help
1417 @item --target-help
1418 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1419
1420 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1421 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1422 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1423 @option{-M} option, above.
1424
1425 @cindex memory usage
1426 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1427 @item --no-keep-memory
1428 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1429 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1430 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1431 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1432 while linking a large executable.
1433
1434 @kindex --no-undefined
1435 @kindex -z defs
1436 @item --no-undefined
1437 @itemx -z defs
1438 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1439 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1440 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1441 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1442 libraries being linked in.
1443
1444 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1445 @kindex -z muldefs
1446 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1447 @itemx -z muldefs
1448 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1449 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1450 first definition will be used.
1451
1452 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1453 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1454 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1455 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1456 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1457 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1458 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1459 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1460 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1461
1462 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1463 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1464 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1465 a shared library.
1466
1467 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1468 libraries specified at link time are that:
1469
1470 @itemize @bullet
1471 @item
1472 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1473 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1474 resolvable at load time.
1475 @item
1476 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1477 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1478
1479 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1480 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1481 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1482 appropriate memset function.
1483 @end itemize
1484
1485 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1486 @item --no-undefined-version
1487 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1488 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1489 will be issued instead.
1490
1491 @kindex --default-symver
1492 @item --default-symver
1493 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1494 exported symbols.
1495
1496 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1497 @item --default-imported-symver
1498 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1499 imported symbols.
1500
1501 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1502 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1503 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1504 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1505 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1506 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1507 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1508 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1509 inappropriate.
1510
1511 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1512 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1513 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1514 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1515
1516 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1517 @item --no-whole-archive
1518 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1519 archive files.
1520
1521 @cindex output file after errors
1522 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1523 @item --noinhibit-exec
1524 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1525 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1526 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1527 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1528
1529 @kindex -nostdlib
1530 @item -nostdlib
1531 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1532 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1533 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1534
1535 @ifclear SingleFormat
1536 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1537 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1538 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1539 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1540 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1541 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1542 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1543 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1544 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1545 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1546 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1547 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1548 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1549 @end ifclear
1550
1551 @kindex -pie
1552 @kindex --pic-executable
1553 @item -pie
1554 @itemx --pic-executable
1555 @cindex position independent executables
1556 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1557 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1558 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1559 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1560 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1561 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1562
1563 @kindex -qmagic
1564 @item -qmagic
1565 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1566
1567 @kindex -Qy
1568 @item -Qy
1569 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1570
1571 @kindex --relax
1572 @cindex synthesizing linker
1573 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1574 @cindex --no-relax
1575 @item --relax
1576 @itemx --no-relax
1577 An option with machine dependent effects.
1578 @ifset GENERIC
1579 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1580 @end ifset
1581 @ifset H8300
1582 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1583 @end ifset
1584 @ifset I960
1585 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1586 @end ifset
1587 @ifset XTENSA
1588 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1589 @end ifset
1590 @ifset M68HC11
1591 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1592 @end ifset
1593 @ifset POWERPC
1594 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1595 @end ifset
1596
1597 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1598 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1599 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1600 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1601 instructions, and combinig constant values.
1602
1603 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1604 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1605 @ifset GENERIC
1606 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1607 family of processors.
1608 @end ifset
1609
1610 @ifset GENERIC
1611 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1612 but ignored.
1613 @end ifset
1614
1615 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1616 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1617
1618 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1619 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1620 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1621 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1622 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1623 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1624 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1625 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1626 @ifset GENERIC
1627 (such as VxWorks)
1628 @end ifset
1629 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1630 run-time memory.
1631
1632 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1633 or symbols needed for relocations.
1634
1635 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1636 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1637
1638 @ifset GENERIC
1639 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1640 @cindex runtime library search path
1641 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1642 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1643 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1644 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1645 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1646 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1647 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1648 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1649 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1650 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1651
1652 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1653 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1654 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1655 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1656 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1657 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1658 file systems.
1659
1660 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1661 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1662 the @option{-rpath} option.
1663 @end ifset
1664
1665 @ifset GENERIC
1666 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1667 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1668 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1669 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1670 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1671 of the input files.
1672
1673 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1674 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1675 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1676 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1677 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1678 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1679 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1680 appearing multiple times.
1681
1682 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1683 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1684 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1685 runtime linker would do.
1686
1687 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1688 libraries:
1689 @enumerate
1690 @item
1691 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1692 @item
1693 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1694 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1695 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1696 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1697 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1698 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1699 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1700 @item
1701 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1702 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1703 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1704 @item
1705 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1706 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1707 @item
1708 For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1709 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1710 @item
1711 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1712 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1713 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1714 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1715 @item
1716 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1717 @item
1718 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1719 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1720 @end enumerate
1721
1722 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1723 warning and continue with the link.
1724 @end ifset
1725
1726 @kindex -shared
1727 @kindex -Bshareable
1728 @item -shared
1729 @itemx -Bshareable
1730 @cindex shared libraries
1731 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1732 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1733 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1734 undefined symbols in the link.
1735
1736 @kindex --sort-common
1737 @item --sort-common
1738 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1739 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1740 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1741 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1742 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1743 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1744 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1745 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1746
1747 @kindex --sort-section=name
1748 @item --sort-section=name
1749 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1750 patterns in the linker script.
1751
1752 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1753 @item --sort-section=alignment
1754 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1755 patterns in the linker script.
1756
1757 @kindex --split-by-file
1758 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1759 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1760 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1761 size of 1 if not given.
1762
1763 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1764 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1765 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1766 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1767 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1768 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1769 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1770 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1771 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1772 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1773 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1774 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1775
1776 @kindex --stats
1777 @item --stats
1778 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1779 as execution time and memory usage.
1780
1781 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1782 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1783 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1784 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1785 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1786
1787 @kindex --traditional-format
1788 @cindex traditional format
1789 @item --traditional-format
1790 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1791 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1792 use the traditional format instead.
1793
1794 @cindex dbx
1795 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1796 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1797 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1798 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1799 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1800 combine duplicate entries.
1801
1802 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1803 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1804 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1805 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1806 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1807 line.
1808 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1809 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1810 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1811 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1812 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1813
1814 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1815 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1816 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1817 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1818 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1819 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1820 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1821 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1822 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1823
1824 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1825 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1826 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1827 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1828 of the first byte of the text segment.
1829
1830 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1831 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1832 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1833 values for @samp{method}:
1834
1835 @table @samp
1836 @item ignore-all
1837 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1838
1839 @item report-all
1840 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1841
1842 @item ignore-in-object-files
1843 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1844 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1845
1846 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1847 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1848 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1849 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1850 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1851 command line.
1852 @end table
1853
1854 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1855 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1856
1857 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1858 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1859 can change this to a warning.
1860
1861 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1862 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1863 @item --dll-verbose
1864 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1865 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1866 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1867 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1868 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1869
1870 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1871 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1872 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1873 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1874 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1875 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1876 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1877 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1878 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1879 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1880 @xref{WIN32}.
1881
1882 @kindex --warn-common
1883 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1884 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1885 @item --warn-common
1886 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1887 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
1888 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1889 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1890 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
1891 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1892
1893 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1894
1895 @table @samp
1896 @item int i = 1;
1897 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1898 file.
1899
1900 @item extern int i;
1901 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1902 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1903 variable somewhere.
1904
1905 @item int i;
1906 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1907 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1908 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1909 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1910 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1911 a definition of the same variable.
1912 @end table
1913
1914 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1915 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1916 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1917 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1918 a common symbol.
1919
1920 @enumerate
1921 @item
1922 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1923 definition for the symbol.
1924 @smallexample
1925 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1926 overridden by definition
1927 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1928 @end smallexample
1929
1930 @item
1931 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1932 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1933 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1934 @smallexample
1935 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1936 overriding common
1937 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1938 @end smallexample
1939
1940 @item
1941 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1942 @smallexample
1943 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1944 of `@var{symbol}'
1945 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1946 @end smallexample
1947
1948 @item
1949 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1950 @smallexample
1951 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1952 overridden by larger common
1953 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1954 @end smallexample
1955
1956 @item
1957 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1958 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1959 encountered in a different order.
1960 @smallexample
1961 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1962 overriding smaller common
1963 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1964 @end smallexample
1965 @end enumerate
1966
1967 @kindex --warn-constructors
1968 @item --warn-constructors
1969 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1970 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1971 detect the use of global constructors.
1972
1973 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1974 @item --warn-multiple-gp
1975 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1976 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1977 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1978 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1979 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1980 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1981 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1982 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1983 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1984 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1985 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1986
1987 @kindex --warn-once
1988 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1989 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1990 @item --warn-once
1991 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1992 which refers to it.
1993
1994 @kindex --warn-section-align
1995 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
1996 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
1997 @item --warn-section-align
1998 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1999 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2000 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2001 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2002 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2003
2004 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2005 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2006 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2007
2008 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2009 @item --warn-alternate-em
2010 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2011
2012 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2013 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2014 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2015 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2016 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2017
2018 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2019 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2020 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2021 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2022
2023 @kindex --whole-archive
2024 @cindex including an entire archive
2025 @item --whole-archive
2026 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2027 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2028 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2029 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2030 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2031 library. This option may be used more than once.
2032
2033 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2034 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2035 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2036 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2037 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2038
2039 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2040 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2041 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2042 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2043 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2044 @var{symbol}.
2045
2046 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2047 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2048 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2049 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2050
2051 Here is a trivial example:
2052
2053 @smallexample
2054 void *
2055 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2056 @{
2057 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2058 return __real_malloc (c);
2059 @}
2060 @end smallexample
2061
2062 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2063 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2064 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2065 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2066
2067 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2068 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2069 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2070 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2071 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2072
2073 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2074 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2075 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2076 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2077
2078 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2079 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2080 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2081 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2082 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2083
2084 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2085 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2086 @item --enable-new-dtags
2087 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2088 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2089 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2090 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2091 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2092 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2093 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2094
2095 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2096 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2097 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2098 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2099 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2100 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2101 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2102
2103 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2104 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2105 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2106 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2107 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2108 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2109 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2110
2111 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2112 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2113 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2114 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2115 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2116 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2117
2118 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2119 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2120 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2121 has been used.
2122
2123 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2124 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2125
2126 @kindex --build-id
2127 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2128 @item --build-id
2129 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2130 Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2131 The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2132 file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
2133 @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2134 parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2135 @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2136 @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2137 an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2138 characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2139 omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2140
2141 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2142 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2143 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2144 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2145 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2146 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2147
2148 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2149 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2150 @end table
2151
2152 @c man end
2153
2154 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2155
2156 @c man begin OPTIONS
2157
2158 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2159 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2160 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2161 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2162 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2163 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2164 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2165 object file).
2166
2167 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2168 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2169 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2170 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2171
2172 @table @gcctabopt
2173
2174 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2175 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2176 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2177 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2178 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2179
2180 @kindex --base-file
2181 @item --base-file @var{file}
2182 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2183 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2184 @file{dlltool}.
2185 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2186
2187 @kindex --dll
2188 @item --dll
2189 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2190 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2191 file.
2192 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2193
2194 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2195 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2196 @item --enable-long-section-names
2197 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2198 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2199 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2200 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2201 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2202 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2203 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2204 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2205 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2206 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2207 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2208 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2209 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2210 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2211 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2212 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2213 image and not stripping symbols.
2214 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2215
2216 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2217 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2218 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2219 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2220 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2221 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2222 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2223 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2224 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2225 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2226 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2227 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2228 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2229 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2230 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2231 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2232 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2233 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2234
2235 @kindex --leading-underscore
2236 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2237 @item --leading-underscore
2238 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2239 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2240 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2241 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2242
2243 @cindex DLLs, creating
2244 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2245 @item --export-all-symbols
2246 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2247 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2248 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2249 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2250 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2251 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2252 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2253 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2254 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2255 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2256 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2257 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2258 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2259 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2260 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2261 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2262 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2263 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2264 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2265 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2266 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2267 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2268 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2269
2270 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2271 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2272 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2273 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2274 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2275
2276 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2277 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2278 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2279 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2280
2281 @kindex --file-alignment
2282 @item --file-alignment
2283 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2284 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2285 512.
2286 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2287
2288 @cindex heap size
2289 @kindex --heap
2290 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2291 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2292 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2293 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
2294 committed.
2295 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2296
2297 @cindex image base
2298 @kindex --image-base
2299 @item --image-base @var{value}
2300 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2301 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2302 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2303 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2304 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2305 for dlls.
2306 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2307
2308 @kindex --kill-at
2309 @item --kill-at
2310 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2311 symbols before they are exported.
2312 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2313
2314 @kindex --large-address-aware
2315 @item --large-address-aware
2316 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2317 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2318 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2319 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2320 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2321 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2322
2323 @kindex --major-image-version
2324 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2325 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2326 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2327
2328 @kindex --major-os-version
2329 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2330 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2331 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2332
2333 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2334 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2335 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2336 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2337
2338 @kindex --minor-image-version
2339 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2340 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2341 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2342
2343 @kindex --minor-os-version
2344 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2345 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2346 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2347
2348 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2349 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2350 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2351 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2352
2353 @cindex DEF files, creating
2354 @cindex DLLs, creating
2355 @kindex --output-def
2356 @item --output-def @var{file}
2357 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2358 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2359 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2360 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2361 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2362 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2363
2364 @cindex DLLs, creating
2365 @kindex --out-implib
2366 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2367 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2368 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2369 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2370 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2371 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2372 creation step.
2373 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2374
2375 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2376 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2377 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2378 using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2379 from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2380 collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2381 avoided.
2382 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2383
2384 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2385 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2386 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2387 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2388 default.
2389 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2390
2391 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2392 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2393 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2394 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2395 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2396 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2397 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2398 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2399 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2400 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2401
2402 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2403 @item --enable-auto-import
2404 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2405 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2406 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2407 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2408 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2409 specification published by Microsoft.
2410
2411 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2412 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2413 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2414 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2415 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2416
2417 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2418 see this message:
2419
2420 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2421 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2422
2423 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2424 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2425 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2426 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2427 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2428 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2429 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2430 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2431 the warning, and exit.
2432
2433 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2434 data type of the exported variable:
2435
2436 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2437 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2438 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2439
2440 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2441 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2442 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2443 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2444
2445 @example
2446 extern type extern_array[];
2447 extern_array[1] -->
2448 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2449 @end example
2450
2451 or
2452
2453 @example
2454 extern type extern_array[];
2455 extern_array[1] -->
2456 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2457 @end example
2458
2459 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2460 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2461
2462 @example
2463 extern struct s extern_struct;
2464 extern_struct.field -->
2465 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2466 @end example
2467
2468 or
2469
2470 @example
2471 extern long long extern_ll;
2472 extern_ll -->
2473 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2474 @end example
2475
2476 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2477 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2478 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
2479 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2480 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2481 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2482 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2483 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2484
2485 Original:
2486 @example
2487 --foo.h
2488 extern int arr[];
2489 --foo.c
2490 #include "foo.h"
2491 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2492 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2493 @}
2494 @end example
2495
2496 Solution 1:
2497 @example
2498 --foo.h
2499 extern int arr[];
2500 --foo.c
2501 #include "foo.h"
2502 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2503 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2504 volatile int *parr = arr;
2505 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2506 @}
2507 @end example
2508
2509 Solution 2:
2510 @example
2511 --foo.h
2512 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2513 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2514 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2515 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2516 #else
2517 #define FOO_IMPORT
2518 #endif
2519 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2520 --foo.c
2521 #include "foo.h"
2522 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2523 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2524 @}
2525 @end example
2526
2527 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2528 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2529 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2530 functions).
2531 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2532
2533 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2534 @item --disable-auto-import
2535 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2536 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2537 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2538
2539 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2540 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2541 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2542 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2543 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2544 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2545 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2546
2547 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2548 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2549 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2550 DLLs. This is the default.
2551 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2552
2553 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2554 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2555 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2556 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2557
2558 @kindex --section-alignment
2559 @item --section-alignment
2560 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2561 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2562 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2563
2564 @cindex stack size
2565 @kindex --stack
2566 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2567 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2568 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2569 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
2570 committed.
2571 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2572
2573 @kindex --subsystem
2574 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2575 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2576 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2577 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2578 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2579 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2580 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2581 @var{which}.
2582 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2583
2584 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2585 of the PE file header:
2586 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2587
2588 @kindex --dynamicbase
2589 @item --dynamicbase
2590 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2591 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2592 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2593
2594 @kindex --forceinteg
2595 @item --forceinteg
2596 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2597
2598 @kindex --nxcompat
2599 @item --nxcompat
2600 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2601 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2602
2603 @kindex --no-isolation
2604 @item --no-isolation
2605 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2606
2607 @kindex --no-seh
2608 @item --no-seh
2609 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2610 this image.
2611
2612 @kindex --no-bind
2613 @item --no-bind
2614 Do not bind this image.
2615
2616 @kindex --wdmdriver
2617 @item --wdmdriver
2618 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2619
2620 @kindex --tsaware
2621 @item --tsaware
2622 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2623
2624 @end table
2625
2626 @c man end
2627
2628 @ifset C6X
2629 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2630
2631 @c man begin OPTIONS
2632
2633 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2634 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2635 all executables use an index of 0.
2636
2637 @table @gcctabopt
2638
2639 @kindex --dsbt-size
2640 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2641 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2642 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2643 entries.
2644
2645 @kindex --dsbt-index
2646 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2647 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2648 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2649 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2650 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2651
2652 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2653 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2654 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2655
2656 @end table
2657
2658 @c man end
2659 @end ifset
2660
2661 @ifset M68HC11
2662 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2663
2664 @c man begin OPTIONS
2665
2666 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2667 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2668
2669 @table @gcctabopt
2670
2671 @kindex --no-trampoline
2672 @item --no-trampoline
2673 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2674 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2675 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2676
2677 @kindex --bank-window
2678 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2679 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2680 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2681 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2682 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2683
2684 @end table
2685
2686 @c man end
2687 @end ifset
2688
2689 @ifset M68K
2690 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2691
2692 @c man begin OPTIONS
2693
2694 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2695 when linking for 68K targets.
2696
2697 @table @gcctabopt
2698
2699 @kindex --got
2700 @item --got=@var{type}
2701 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2702 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2703 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2704 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2705
2706 @end table
2707
2708 @c man end
2709 @end ifset
2710
2711 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2712 @node Environment
2713 @section Environment Variables
2714
2715 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2716
2717 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2718 @ifclear SingleFormat
2719 @code{GNUTARGET},
2720 @end ifclear
2721 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2722
2723 @ifclear SingleFormat
2724 @kindex GNUTARGET
2725 @cindex default input format
2726 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2727 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2728 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2729 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2730 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2731 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2732 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2733 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2734 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2735 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2736 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2737 @end ifclear
2738
2739 @kindex LDEMULATION
2740 @cindex default emulation
2741 @cindex emulation, default
2742 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2743 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2744 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2745 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2746 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2747 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2748 linker was configured.
2749
2750 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2751 @cindex demangling, default
2752 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2753 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2754 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2755 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2756 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2757 options.
2758
2759 @c man end
2760 @end ifset
2761
2762 @node Scripts
2763 @chapter Linker Scripts
2764
2765 @cindex scripts
2766 @cindex linker scripts
2767 @cindex command files
2768 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2769 written in the linker command language.
2770
2771 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2772 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2773 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2774 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2775 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2776 described below.
2777
2778 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2779 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2780 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2781 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2782 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2783
2784 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2785 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2786 default linker script.
2787
2788 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2789 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2790 Linker Scripts}.
2791
2792 @menu
2793 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2794 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2795 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2796 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2797 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2798 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2799 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2800 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2801 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2802 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2803 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2804 @end menu
2805
2806 @node Basic Script Concepts
2807 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2808 @cindex linker script concepts
2809 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2810 describe the linker script language.
2811
2812 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2813 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2814 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2815 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2816 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2817 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2818 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2819 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2820
2821 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2822 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2823 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2824 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2825 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2826 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2827 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2828 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2829 of debugging information.
2830
2831 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2832 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2833 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2834 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2835 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2836 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2837 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2838 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2839 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2840 RAM address would be the VMA.
2841
2842 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2843 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2844
2845 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2846 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2847 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2848 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2849 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2850 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2851 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2852
2853 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2854 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2855 option.
2856
2857 @node Script Format
2858 @section Linker Script Format
2859 @cindex linker script format
2860 Linker scripts are text files.
2861
2862 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2863 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2864 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2865 generally ignored.
2866
2867 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2868 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2869 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2870 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2871 file name.
2872
2873 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2874 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2875 to whitespace.
2876
2877 @node Simple Example
2878 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2879 @cindex linker script example
2880 @cindex example of linker script
2881 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2882
2883 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2884 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2885 memory layout of the output file.
2886
2887 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2888 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2889 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2890 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2891 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2892 your input files.
2893
2894 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2895 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2896 linker script which will do that:
2897 @smallexample
2898 SECTIONS
2899 @{
2900 . = 0x10000;
2901 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2902 . = 0x8000000;
2903 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2904 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2905 @}
2906 @end smallexample
2907
2908 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2909 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2910 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2911
2912 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2913 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2914 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2915 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2916 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2917 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2918 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2919
2920 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2921 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2922 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2923 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2924 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2925 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2926
2927 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2928 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2929 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2930
2931 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2932 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2933 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2934 output section, the value of the location counter will be
2935 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2936 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
2937 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
2938
2939 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2940 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2941 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2942 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2943 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2944 sections.
2945
2946 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2947
2948 @node Simple Commands
2949 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
2950 @cindex linker script simple commands
2951 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2952
2953 @menu
2954 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2955 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2956 @ifclear SingleFormat
2957 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2958 @end ifclear
2959
2960 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
2961 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2962 @end menu
2963
2964 @node Entry Point
2965 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
2966 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2967 @cindex start of execution
2968 @cindex first instruction
2969 @cindex entry point
2970 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2971 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2972 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2973 @smallexample
2974 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2975 @end smallexample
2976
2977 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2978 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2979 stopping when one of them succeeds:
2980 @itemize @bullet
2981 @item
2982 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
2983 @item
2984 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
2985 @item
2986 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2987 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2988 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
2989 @item
2990 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
2991 @item
2992 The address @code{0}.
2993 @end itemize
2994
2995 @node File Commands
2996 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
2997 @cindex linker script file commands
2998 Several linker script commands deal with files.
2999
3000 @table @code
3001 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3002 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3003 @cindex including a linker script
3004 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3005 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3006 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3007 10 levels deep.
3008
3009 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3010 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3011
3012 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3013 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3014 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3015 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3016 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3017 @cindex linker script input object files
3018 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3019 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3020
3021 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3022 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3023 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3024
3025 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3026 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3027
3028 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3029 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3030 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3031 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3032 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3033 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3034 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3035
3036 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3037 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3038 @samp{-l}.
3039
3040 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3041 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3042 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3043
3044 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3045 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3046 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3047 @cindex grouping input files
3048 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3049 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3050 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3051 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3052
3053 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3054 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3055 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3056 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3057 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3058 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3059 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3060 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3061 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3062 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3063 setting afterwards.
3064
3065 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3066 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3067 @cindex output file name in linker script
3068 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3069 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3070 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3071 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3072 precedence.
3073
3074 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3075 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3076
3077 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3078 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3079 @cindex library search path in linker script
3080 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3081 @cindex search path in linker script
3082 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3083 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3084 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3085 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3086 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3087 the command line option are searched first.
3088
3089 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3090 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3091 @cindex first input file
3092 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3093 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3094 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3095 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3096 first file.
3097 @end table
3098
3099 @ifclear SingleFormat
3100 @node Format Commands
3101 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3102 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3103
3104 @table @code
3105 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3106 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3107 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3108 @cindex output file format in linker script
3109 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3110 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3111 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3112 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3113 line option takes precedence.
3114
3115 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3116 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3117 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3118 desired endianness.
3119
3120 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3121 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3122 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3123 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3124
3125 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3126 command:
3127 @smallexample
3128 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3129 @end smallexample
3130 This says that the default format for the output file is
3131 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3132 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3133 format.
3134
3135 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3136 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3137 @cindex input file format in linker script
3138 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3139 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3140 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3141 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3142 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3143 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3144 @end table
3145 @end ifclear
3146
3147 @node REGION_ALIAS
3148 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3149 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3150 @cindex region alias
3151 @cindex region names
3152
3153 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3154 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3155
3156 @smallexample
3157 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3158 @end smallexample
3159
3160 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3161 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3162 to memory regions. An example follows.
3163
3164 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3165 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3166 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3167 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3168 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3169 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3170 sections:
3171
3172 @itemize @bullet
3173 @item
3174 @code{.text} program code;
3175 @item
3176 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3177 @item
3178 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3179 @item
3180 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3181 @end itemize
3182
3183 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3184 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3185 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3186 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3187 @code{C}:
3188 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3189 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3190 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3191 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3192 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3193 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3194 @end multitable
3195 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3196 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3197 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3198 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3199
3200 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3201 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3202 memory layout:
3203 @smallexample
3204 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3205
3206 SECTIONS
3207 @{
3208 .text :
3209 @{
3210 *(.text)
3211 @} > REGION_TEXT
3212 .rodata :
3213 @{
3214 *(.rodata)
3215 rodata_end = .;
3216 @} > REGION_RODATA
3217 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3218 @{
3219 data_start = .;
3220 *(.data)
3221 @} > REGION_DATA
3222 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3223 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3224 .bss :
3225 @{
3226 *(.bss)
3227 @} > REGION_BSS
3228 @}
3229 @end smallexample
3230
3231 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3232 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3233 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3234 @table @code
3235 @item A
3236 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3237 @smallexample
3238 MEMORY
3239 @{
3240 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3241 @}
3242
3243 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3244 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3245 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3246 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3247 @end smallexample
3248 @item B
3249 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3250 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3251 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3252 @smallexample
3253 MEMORY
3254 @{
3255 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3256 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3257 @}
3258
3259 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3260 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3261 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3262 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3263 @end smallexample
3264 @item C
3265 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3266 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3267 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3268 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3269 @smallexample
3270 MEMORY
3271 @{
3272 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3273 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3274 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3275 @}
3276
3277 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3278 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3279 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3280 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3281 @end smallexample
3282 @end table
3283
3284 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3285 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3286 necessary:
3287 @smallexample
3288 #include <string.h>
3289
3290 extern char data_start [];
3291 extern char data_size [];
3292 extern char data_load_start [];
3293
3294 void copy_data(void)
3295 @{
3296 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3297 @{
3298 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3299 @}
3300 @}
3301 @end smallexample
3302
3303 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3304 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3305 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3306
3307 @table @code
3308 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3309 @kindex ASSERT
3310 @cindex assertion in linker script
3311 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3312 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3313
3314 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3315 @kindex EXTERN
3316 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3317 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3318 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3319 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3320 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3321 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3322
3323 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3324 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3325 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3326 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3327 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3328 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3329
3330 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3331 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3332 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3333 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3334 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3335 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3336
3337 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3338 @kindex INSERT
3339 @cindex insert user script into default script
3340 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3341 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3342 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3343 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3344 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3345 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3346 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3347 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3348 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3349 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3350 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3351 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3352 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3353
3354 @smallexample
3355 SECTIONS
3356 @{
3357 OVERLAY :
3358 @{
3359 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3360 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3361 @}
3362 @}
3363 INSERT AFTER .text;
3364 @end smallexample
3365
3366 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3367 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3368 @cindex cross references
3369 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3370 references among certain output sections.
3371
3372 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3373 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3374 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3375 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3376 a function defined in the other section.
3377
3378 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3379 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3380 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3381 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3382 names.
3383
3384 @ifclear SingleFormat
3385 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3386 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3387 @cindex machine architecture
3388 @cindex architecture
3389 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3390 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3391 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3392 the @samp{-f} option.
3393 @end ifclear
3394
3395 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3396 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3397 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3398 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3399 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3400 @xref{Expression Section}.
3401 @end table
3402
3403 @node Assignments
3404 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3405 @cindex assignment in scripts
3406 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3407 @cindex variables, defining
3408 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3409 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3410
3411 @menu
3412 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3413 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3414 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3415 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3416 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3417 @end menu
3418
3419 @node Simple Assignments
3420 @subsection Simple Assignments
3421
3422 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3423
3424 @table @code
3425 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3426 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3427 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3428 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3429 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3430 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3431 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3432 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3433 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3434 @end table
3435
3436 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3437 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3438 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3439
3440 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3441 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3442
3443 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3444
3445 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3446
3447 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3448 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3449 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3450
3451 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3452 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3453
3454 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3455 assignments may be used:
3456
3457 @smallexample
3458 floating_point = 0;
3459 SECTIONS
3460 @{
3461 .text :
3462 @{
3463 *(.text)
3464 _etext = .;
3465 @}
3466 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3467 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3468 @}
3469 @end smallexample
3470 @noindent
3471 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3472 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3473 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3474 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3475 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3476
3477 @node HIDDEN
3478 @subsection HIDDEN
3479 @cindex HIDDEN
3480 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3481 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3482
3483 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3484 @code{HIDDEN}:
3485
3486 @smallexample
3487 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3488 SECTIONS
3489 @{
3490 .text :
3491 @{
3492 *(.text)
3493 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3494 @}
3495 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3496 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3497 @}
3498 @end smallexample
3499 @noindent
3500 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3501
3502 @node PROVIDE
3503 @subsection PROVIDE
3504 @cindex PROVIDE
3505 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3506 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3507 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3508 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3509 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3510 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3511 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3512 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3513
3514 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3515 @smallexample
3516 SECTIONS
3517 @{
3518 .text :
3519 @{
3520 *(.text)
3521 _etext = .;
3522 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3523 @}
3524 @}
3525 @end smallexample
3526
3527 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3528 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3529 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3530 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3531 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3532 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3533
3534 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3535 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3536 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3537 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3538 hidden and won't be exported.
3539
3540 @node Source Code Reference
3541 @subsection Source Code Reference
3542
3543 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3544 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3545 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3546 symbol that does not have a value.
3547
3548 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3549 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3550 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3551 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3552 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3553 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3554 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3555 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3556
3557 @smallexample
3558 extern int foo;
3559 @end smallexample
3560
3561 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3562
3563 @smallexample
3564 _foo = 1000;
3565 @end smallexample
3566
3567 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3568 transformation has taken place.
3569
3570 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3571 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3572 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3573 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3574 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3575 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3576 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3577
3578 @smallexample
3579 int foo = 1000;
3580 @end smallexample
3581
3582 creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3583 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3584 number 1000 is initially stored.
3585
3586 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3587 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3588 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3589 So:
3590
3591 @smallexample
3592 foo = 1;
3593 @end smallexample
3594
3595 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3596 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3597 address. Whereas:
3598
3599 @smallexample
3600 int * a = & foo;
3601 @end smallexample
3602
3603 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3604 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3605 the variable @samp{a}.
3606
3607 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3608 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3609 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3610
3611 @smallexample
3612 foo = 1000;
3613 @end smallexample
3614
3615 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3616 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3617 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3618 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3619 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3620
3621 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3622 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3623 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3624 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3625 linker script contains these declarations:
3626
3627 @smallexample
3628 @group
3629 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3630 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3631 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3632 @end group
3633 @end smallexample
3634
3635 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3636
3637 @smallexample
3638 @group
3639 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3640
3641 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3642 @end group
3643 @end smallexample
3644
3645 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3646
3647 @node SECTIONS
3648 @section SECTIONS Command
3649 @kindex SECTIONS
3650 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3651 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3652
3653 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3654 @smallexample
3655 SECTIONS
3656 @{
3657 @var{sections-command}
3658 @var{sections-command}
3659 @dots{}
3660 @}
3661 @end smallexample
3662
3663 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3664
3665 @itemize @bullet
3666 @item
3667 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3668 @item
3669 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3670 @item
3671 an output section description
3672 @item
3673 an overlay description
3674 @end itemize
3675
3676 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3677 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3678 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3679 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3680 the layout of the output file.
3681
3682 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3683 below.
3684
3685 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3686 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3687 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3688 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3689 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3690 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3691
3692 @menu
3693 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3694 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3695 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3696 * Input Section:: Input section description
3697 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3698 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3699 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3700 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3701 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3702 @end menu
3703
3704 @node Output Section Description
3705 @subsection Output Section Description
3706 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3707 @smallexample
3708 @group
3709 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3710 [AT(@var{lma})]
3711 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3712 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3713 [@var{constraint}]
3714 @{
3715 @var{output-section-command}
3716 @var{output-section-command}
3717 @dots{}
3718 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
3719 @end group
3720 @end smallexample
3721
3722 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3723
3724 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3725 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3726 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3727
3728 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3729
3730 @itemize @bullet
3731 @item
3732 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3733 @item
3734 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3735 @item
3736 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3737 @item
3738 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3739 @end itemize
3740
3741 @node Output Section Name
3742 @subsection Output Section Name
3743 @cindex name, section
3744 @cindex section name
3745 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3746 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3747 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3748 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3749 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3750 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3751 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3752 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3753 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3754 commas must be quoted.
3755
3756 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3757 Discarding}.
3758
3759 @node Output Section Address
3760 @subsection Output Section Address
3761 @cindex address, section
3762 @cindex section address
3763 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3764 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3765 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3766
3767 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3768 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3769 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3770 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3771 contained within the output section.
3772
3773 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3774
3775 @itemize @bullet
3776 @item
3777 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3778 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3779 in that region.
3780
3781 @item
3782 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3783 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3784 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3785 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3786
3787 @item
3788 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3789 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3790 counter.
3791 @end itemize
3792
3793 @noindent
3794 For example:
3795
3796 @smallexample
3797 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3798 @end smallexample
3799
3800 @noindent
3801 and
3802
3803 @smallexample
3804 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3805 @end smallexample
3806
3807 @noindent
3808 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3809 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3810 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3811 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3812 input sections.
3813
3814 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3815 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3816 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3817 do something like this:
3818 @smallexample
3819 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3820 @end smallexample
3821 @noindent
3822 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3823 aligned upward to the specified value.
3824
3825 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3826 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3827 sections are ignored).
3828
3829 @node Input Section
3830 @subsection Input Section Description
3831 @cindex input sections
3832 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3833 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3834
3835 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3836 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3837 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3838 map the input files into your memory layout.
3839
3840 @menu
3841 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3842 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3843 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3844 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3845 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3846 @end menu
3847
3848 @node Input Section Basics
3849 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3850 @cindex input section basics
3851 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3852 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3853
3854 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3855 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3856
3857 The most common input section description is to include all input
3858 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3859 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3860 @smallexample
3861 *(.text)
3862 @end smallexample
3863 @noindent
3864 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3865 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3866 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3867 example:
3868 @smallexample
3869 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3870 @end smallexample
3871 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3872 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3873
3874 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3875 @smallexample
3876 *(.text .rdata)
3877 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3878 @end smallexample
3879 @noindent
3880 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3881 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3882 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3883 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3884 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3885 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3886
3887 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3888 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3889 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3890 @smallexample
3891 data.o(.data)
3892 @end smallexample
3893
3894 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3895 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3896
3897 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3898
3899 @smallexample
3900 @group
3901 SECTIONS @{
3902 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3903 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3904 @}
3905 @end group
3906 @end smallexample
3907
3908 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3909 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3910 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3911 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3912 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3913
3914 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3915 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3916 with no whitespace around the colon.
3917
3918 @table @samp
3919 @item archive:file
3920 matches file within archive
3921 @item archive:
3922 matches the whole archive
3923 @item :file
3924 matches file but not one in an archive
3925 @end table
3926
3927 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3928 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3929 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3930 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3931 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3932 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3933 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3934 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3935 command.
3936
3937 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3938 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3939 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3940 @smallexample
3941 data.o
3942 @end smallexample
3943
3944 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3945 and does not contain any wild card
3946 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3947 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3948 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3949 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3950 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3951 the archive search path.
3952
3953 @node Input Section Wildcards
3954 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
3955 @cindex input section wildcards
3956 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
3957 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
3958 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
3959 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3960 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3961
3962 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3963 pattern for the file name.
3964
3965 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3966
3967 @table @samp
3968 @item *
3969 matches any number of characters
3970 @item ?
3971 matches any single character
3972 @item [@var{chars}]
3973 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3974 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3975 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3976 @item \
3977 quotes the following character
3978 @end table
3979
3980 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3981 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3982 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3983 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3984 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3985 a @samp{/} character.
3986
3987 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3988 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3989 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3990
3991 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3992 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3993 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3994 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3995 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3996 @smallexample
3997 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3998 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3999 @end smallexample
4000
4001 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4002 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4003 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4004 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4005 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4006 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4007 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4008
4009 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4010 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4011 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4012 ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4013
4014 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4015 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4016 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4017 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4018 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4019
4020 @cindex SORT
4021 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4022
4023 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4024 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4025
4026 @enumerate
4027 @item
4028 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4029 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
4030 sections have the same name.
4031 @item
4032 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4033 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
4034 sections have the same alignment.
4035 @item
4036 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4037 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4038 @item
4039 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4040 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4041 @item
4042 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4043 @end enumerate
4044
4045 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4046 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4047 takes precedence over the command line option.
4048
4049 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4050 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4051 treated as nested sorting command.
4052
4053 @enumerate
4054 @item
4055 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4056 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4057 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4058 @item
4059 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4060 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4061 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4062 @end enumerate
4063
4064 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4065 command line option will be ignored.
4066
4067 @cindex SORT_NONE
4068 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4069 section sorting option.
4070
4071 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4072 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4073 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4074
4075 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4076 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4077 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4078 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4079 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4080 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4081 @smallexample
4082 @group
4083 SECTIONS @{
4084 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4085 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4086 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4087 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4088 @}
4089 @end group
4090 @end smallexample
4091
4092 @node Input Section Common
4093 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4094 @cindex common symbol placement
4095 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4096 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4097 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4098 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4099 named @samp{COMMON}.
4100
4101 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4102 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4103 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4104 input files are placed in another section.
4105
4106 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4107 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4108 @smallexample
4109 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4110 @end smallexample
4111
4112 @cindex scommon section
4113 @cindex small common symbols
4114 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4115 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4116 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4117 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4118 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4119 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4120 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4121 locations.
4122
4123 @cindex [COMMON]
4124 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4125 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4126 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4127
4128 @node Input Section Keep
4129 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4130 @cindex KEEP
4131 @cindex garbage collection
4132 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4133 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4134 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4135 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4136 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4137
4138 @node Input Section Example
4139 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4140 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4141 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4142 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4143 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4144 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4145 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4146 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4147 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4148 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4149
4150 @smallexample
4151 @group
4152 SECTIONS @{
4153 outputa 0x10000 :
4154 @{
4155 all.o
4156 foo.o (.input1)
4157 @}
4158 @end group
4159 @group
4160 outputb :
4161 @{
4162 foo.o (.input2)
4163 foo1.o (.input1)
4164 @}
4165 @end group
4166 @group
4167 outputc :
4168 @{
4169 *(.input1)
4170 *(.input2)
4171 @}
4172 @}
4173 @end group
4174 @end smallexample
4175
4176 @node Output Section Data
4177 @subsection Output Section Data
4178 @cindex data
4179 @cindex section data
4180 @cindex output section data
4181 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4182 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4183 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4184 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4185 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4186 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4187 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4188 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4189 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4190 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4191 counter.
4192
4193 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4194 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4195 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4196 stored.
4197
4198 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4199 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4200 @smallexample
4201 BYTE(1)
4202 LONG(addr)
4203 @end smallexample
4204
4205 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4206 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4207 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4208 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4209 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4210
4211 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4212 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4213 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4214 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4215 endianness of the first input object file.
4216
4217 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4218 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4219 @smallexample
4220 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4221 @end smallexample
4222 whereas this will work:
4223 @smallexample
4224 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4225 @end smallexample
4226
4227 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4228 @cindex holes, filling
4229 @cindex unspecified memory
4230 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4231 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4232 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4233 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4234 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4235 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4236 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4237 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4238 different parts of an output section.
4239
4240 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4241 value @samp{0x90}:
4242 @smallexample
4243 FILL(0x90909090)
4244 @end smallexample
4245
4246 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4247 section attribute, but it only affects the
4248 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4249 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4250 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4251 expression.
4252
4253 @node Output Section Keywords
4254 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4255 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4256 commands.
4257
4258 @table @code
4259 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4260 @cindex input filename symbols
4261 @cindex filename symbols
4262 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4263 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4264 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4265 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4266 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4267
4268 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4269 normally used for any other object file format.
4270
4271 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4272 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4273 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4274 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4275 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4276 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4277 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4278 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4279 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4280 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4281 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4282 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4283 ignored for other object file formats.
4284
4285 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4286 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4287 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4288 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4289 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4290 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4291 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4292 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4293 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4294 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4295 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4296 @code{exit}.
4297
4298 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4299 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4300 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4301 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4302 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4303 runtime code expects to see.
4304
4305 @smallexample
4306 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4307 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4308 *(.ctors)
4309 LONG(0)
4310 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4311 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4312 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4313 *(.dtors)
4314 LONG(0)
4315 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4316 @end smallexample
4317
4318 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4319 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4320 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4321 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4322 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4323 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4324 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4325 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4326
4327 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4328 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4329 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4330 scripts.
4331
4332 @end table
4333
4334 @node Output Section Discarding
4335 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4336 @cindex discarding sections
4337 @cindex sections, discarding
4338 @cindex removing sections
4339 The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4340 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4341 be present in any of the input files. For example:
4342 @smallexample
4343 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4344 @end smallexample
4345 @noindent
4346 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4347 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4348 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4349 space in an output section will also create the output section.
4350
4351 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4352 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4353 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4354 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4355 section is discarded.
4356
4357 @cindex /DISCARD/
4358 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4359 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4360 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4361
4362 @node Output Section Attributes
4363 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4364 @cindex output section attributes
4365 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4366 like this:
4367
4368 @smallexample
4369 @group
4370 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4371 [AT(@var{lma})]
4372 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4373 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4374 [@var{constraint}]
4375 @{
4376 @var{output-section-command}
4377 @var{output-section-command}
4378 @dots{}
4379 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4380 @end group
4381 @end smallexample
4382
4383 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4384 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4385 remaining section attributes.
4386
4387 @menu
4388 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4389 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4390 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4391 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4392 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4393 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4394 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4395 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4396 @end menu
4397
4398 @node Output Section Type
4399 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4400 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4401 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4402
4403 @table @code
4404 @item NOLOAD
4405 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4406 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4407 @item DSECT
4408 @itemx COPY
4409 @itemx INFO
4410 @itemx OVERLAY
4411 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4412 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4413 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4414 section when the program is run.
4415 @end table
4416
4417 @kindex NOLOAD
4418 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4419 @cindex loading, preventing
4420 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4421 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4422 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4423 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4424 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4425 @smallexample
4426 @group
4427 SECTIONS @{
4428 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4429 @dots{}
4430 @}
4431 @end group
4432 @end smallexample
4433
4434 @node Output Section LMA
4435 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4436 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4437 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4438 @cindex load address
4439 @cindex section load address
4440 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4441 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4442 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4443 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4444 address is optional.
4445
4446 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4447 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4448 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4449 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4450 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4451
4452 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4453 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4454 load address:
4455
4456 @itemize @bullet
4457 @item
4458 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4459 the LMA address as well.
4460
4461 @item
4462 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4463
4464 @item
4465 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4466 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4467 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4468 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4469 the last section in the located region.
4470
4471 @item
4472 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4473 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4474
4475 @item
4476 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4477 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4478 @end itemize
4479
4480 @cindex ROM initialized data
4481 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4482 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4483 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4484 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4485 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4486 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4487 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4488 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4489 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4490
4491 @smallexample
4492 @group
4493 SECTIONS
4494 @{
4495 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4496 .mdata 0x2000 :
4497 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4498 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4499 .bss 0x3000 :
4500 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4501 @}
4502 @end group
4503 @end smallexample
4504
4505 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4506 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4507 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4508 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4509 script.
4510
4511 @smallexample
4512 @group
4513 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4514 char *src = &_etext;
4515 char *dst = &_data;
4516
4517 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4518 while (dst < &_edata)
4519 *dst++ = *src++;
4520
4521 /* Zero bss. */
4522 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4523 *dst = 0;
4524 @end group
4525 @end smallexample
4526
4527 @node Forced Output Alignment
4528 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4529 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4530 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4531 @cindex output section alignment
4532 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
4533
4534 @node Forced Input Alignment
4535 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4536 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4537 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4538 @cindex input section alignment
4539 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4540 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4541 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4542
4543 @node Output Section Constraint
4544 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4545 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4546 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4547 @cindex constraints on output sections
4548 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4549 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4550 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4551 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4552
4553 @node Output Section Region
4554 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4555 @kindex >@var{region}
4556 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4557 @cindex memory regions and sections
4558 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4559 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4560
4561 Here is a simple example:
4562 @smallexample
4563 @group
4564 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4565 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4566 @end group
4567 @end smallexample
4568
4569 @node Output Section Phdr
4570 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4571 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4572 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4573 @cindex program headers and sections
4574 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4575 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4576 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4577 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4578 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4579 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4580
4581 Here is a simple example:
4582 @smallexample
4583 @group
4584 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4585 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4586 @end group
4587 @end smallexample
4588
4589 @node Output Section Fill
4590 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4591 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4592 @cindex section fill pattern
4593 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4594 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4595 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4596 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4597 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4598 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4599 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4600 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4601 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4602 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4603 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4604 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4605 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4606
4607 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4608 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4609
4610 Here is a simple example:
4611 @smallexample
4612 @group
4613 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4614 @end group
4615 @end smallexample
4616
4617 @node Overlay Description
4618 @subsection Overlay Description
4619 @kindex OVERLAY
4620 @cindex overlays
4621 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4622 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4623 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4624 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4625 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4626 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4627 than another.
4628
4629 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4630 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4631 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4632 command is as follows:
4633 @smallexample
4634 @group
4635 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4636 @{
4637 @var{secname1}
4638 @{
4639 @var{output-section-command}
4640 @var{output-section-command}
4641 @dots{}
4642 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4643 @var{secname2}
4644 @{
4645 @var{output-section-command}
4646 @var{output-section-command}
4647 @dots{}
4648 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4649 @dots{}
4650 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4651 @end group
4652 @end smallexample
4653
4654 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4655 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4656 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4657 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4658 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4659 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4660
4661 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4662 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4663 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4664 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4665 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4666 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4667
4668 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4669 among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4670 all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4671 section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4672 NOCROSSREFS}.
4673
4674 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4675 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4676 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4677 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4678 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4679 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4680 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4681
4682 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4683 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4684
4685 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4686 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4687 @smallexample
4688 @group
4689 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4690 @{
4691 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4692 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4693 @}
4694 @end group
4695 @end smallexample
4696 @noindent
4697 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4698 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4699 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4700 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4701 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4702 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4703
4704 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4705 like the following.
4706
4707 @smallexample
4708 @group
4709 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4710 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4711 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4712 @end group
4713 @end smallexample
4714
4715 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4716 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4717 example could have been written identically as follows.
4718
4719 @smallexample
4720 @group
4721 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4722 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4723 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4724 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4725 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4726 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4727 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4728 @end group
4729 @end smallexample
4730
4731 @node MEMORY
4732 @section MEMORY Command
4733 @kindex MEMORY
4734 @cindex memory regions
4735 @cindex regions of memory
4736 @cindex allocating memory
4737 @cindex discontinuous memory
4738 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4739 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4740
4741 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4742 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4743 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4744 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4745 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4746 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4747 around to fit into the available regions.
4748
4749 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4750 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4751 you wish. The syntax is:
4752 @smallexample
4753 @group
4754 MEMORY
4755 @{
4756 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4757 @dots{}
4758 @}
4759 @end group
4760 @end smallexample
4761
4762 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4763 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4764 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4765 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4766 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4767 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4768 command.
4769
4770 @cindex memory region attributes
4771 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4772 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4773 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4774 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4775 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4776 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4777 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4778
4779 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4780 @table @samp
4781 @item R
4782 Read-only section
4783 @item W
4784 Read/write section
4785 @item X
4786 Executable section
4787 @item A
4788 Allocatable section
4789 @item I
4790 Initialized section
4791 @item L
4792 Same as @samp{I}
4793 @item !
4794 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4795 @end table
4796
4797 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4798 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4799 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4800 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4801 attributes.
4802
4803 @kindex ORIGIN =
4804 @kindex o =
4805 @kindex org =
4806 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4807 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4808 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4809 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4810 @code{ORG}).
4811
4812 @kindex LENGTH =
4813 @kindex len =
4814 @kindex l =
4815 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4816 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4817 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4818 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4819
4820 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4821 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4822 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4823 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4824 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4825 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4826 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4827 region.
4828
4829 @smallexample
4830 @group
4831 MEMORY
4832 @{
4833 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4834 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4835 @}
4836 @end group
4837 @end smallexample
4838
4839 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4840 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4841 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4842 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4843 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4844 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4845 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4846 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4847 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4848
4849 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4850 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4851 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4852
4853 @smallexample
4854 @group
4855 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4856 @end group
4857 @end smallexample
4858
4859 @node PHDRS
4860 @section PHDRS Command
4861 @kindex PHDRS
4862 @cindex program headers
4863 @cindex ELF program headers
4864 @cindex program segments
4865 @cindex segments, ELF
4866 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4867 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4868 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4869 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4870
4871 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4872 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4873 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4874 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4875 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4876
4877 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4878 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4879 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4880 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4881 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4882
4883 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4884 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4885 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4886
4887 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4888 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4889
4890 @smallexample
4891 @group
4892 PHDRS
4893 @{
4894 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4895 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4896 @}
4897 @end group
4898 @end smallexample
4899
4900 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4901 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4902 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4903 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4904 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4905 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
4906
4907 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4908 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4909 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4910 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4911 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4912 Section Phdr}.
4913
4914 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4915 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4916 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4917 contain the section.
4918
4919 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4920 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4921 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4922 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4923 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4924 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4925 segment at all.
4926
4927 @kindex FILEHDR
4928 @kindex PHDRS
4929 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
4930 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4931 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4932 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4933 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4934 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4935 these keywords.
4936
4937 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4938 value of the keyword.
4939
4940 @table @asis
4941 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4942 Indicates an unused program header.
4943
4944 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4945 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4946 the file.
4947
4948 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4949 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4950
4951 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4952 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4953 found.
4954
4955 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4956 Indicates a segment holding note information.
4957
4958 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4959 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4960 ABI.
4961
4962 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4963 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4964
4965 @item @var{expression}
4966 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4967 be used for types not defined above.
4968 @end table
4969
4970 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4971 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4972 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4973 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4974 output section attribute.
4975
4976 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4977 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4978 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4979 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4980 header.
4981
4982 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4983 headers used on a native ELF system.
4984
4985 @example
4986 @group
4987 PHDRS
4988 @{
4989 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4990 interp PT_INTERP ;
4991 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4992 data PT_LOAD ;
4993 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4994 @}
4995
4996 SECTIONS
4997 @{
4998 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4999 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5000 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5001 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5002 @dots{}
5003 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5004 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5005 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5006 @dots{}
5007 @}
5008 @end group
5009 @end example
5010
5011 @node VERSION
5012 @section VERSION Command
5013 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5014 @cindex symbol versions
5015 @cindex version script
5016 @cindex versions of symbols
5017 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5018 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5019 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5020 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5021 shared library.
5022
5023 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5024 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5025 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5026
5027 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5028 @smallexample
5029 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5030 @end smallexample
5031
5032 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5033 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5034 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5035 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5036 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5037 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5038 library.
5039
5040 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5041 examples.
5042
5043 @smallexample
5044 VERS_1.1 @{
5045 global:
5046 foo1;
5047 local:
5048 old*;
5049 original*;
5050 new*;
5051 @};
5052
5053 VERS_1.2 @{
5054 foo2;
5055 @} VERS_1.1;
5056
5057 VERS_2.0 @{
5058 bar1; bar2;
5059 extern "C++" @{
5060 ns::*;
5061 "f(int, double)";
5062 @};
5063 @} VERS_1.2;
5064 @end smallexample
5065
5066 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5067 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5068 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5069 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5070 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5071 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5072 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5073 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5074 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5075 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5076
5077 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5078 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5079 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5080
5081 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5082 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5083 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5084
5085 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5086 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5087 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5088 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5089 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5090 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5091 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5092 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5093 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5094
5095 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5096 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5097 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5098 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5099
5100 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5101 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5102 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5103 won't.
5104
5105 @smallexample
5106 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5107 @end smallexample
5108
5109 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5110 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5111 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5112 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5113 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5114 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5115 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5116 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5117 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5118 search for each symbol reference.
5119
5120 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5121 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5122 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5123 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5124 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5125 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5126 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5127 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5128 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5129
5130 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5131 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5132 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5133 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5134 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5135 @smallexample
5136 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5137 @end smallexample
5138 @noindent
5139 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5140 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5141 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5142 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5143 takes precedence over a version script.
5144
5145 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5146 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5147 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5148 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5149 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5150
5151 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5152 source file. Here is an example:
5153
5154 @smallexample
5155 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5156 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5157 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5158 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5159 @end smallexample
5160
5161 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5162 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5163 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5164 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5165
5166 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5167 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5168 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5169 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5170 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5171 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5172
5173 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5174 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5175 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5176 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5177
5178 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5179
5180 @smallexample
5181 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5182 @end smallexample
5183
5184 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5185 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5186 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5187 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5188 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5189
5190 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5191 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5192 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5193 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5194 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5195 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5196 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5197 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5198 expect when you upgrade.
5199
5200 @node Expressions
5201 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5202 @cindex expressions
5203 @cindex arithmetic
5204 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5205 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5206 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5207 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5208
5209 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5210
5211 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5212 expressions.
5213
5214 @menu
5215 * Constants:: Constants
5216 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5217 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5218 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5219 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5220 * Operators:: Operators
5221 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5222 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5223 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5224 @end menu
5225
5226 @node Constants
5227 @subsection Constants
5228 @cindex integer notation
5229 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5230 All constants are integers.
5231
5232 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5233 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5234 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5235 @samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5236 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5237 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5238
5239 @cindex scaled integers
5240 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5241 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5242 @cindex suffixes for integers
5243 @cindex integer suffixes
5244 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5245 constant by
5246 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5247 @ifnottex
5248 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5249 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5250 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5251 @end ifnottex
5252 @tex
5253 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5254 @end tex
5255 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5256 respectively. For example, the following
5257 all refer to the same quantity:
5258
5259 @smallexample
5260 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5261 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5262 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5263 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5264 @end smallexample
5265
5266 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5267 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5268
5269 @node Symbolic Constants
5270 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5271 @cindex symbolic constants
5272 @kindex CONSTANT
5273 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5274 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5275
5276 @table @code
5277 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5278 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5279 The target's maximum page size.
5280
5281 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5282 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5283 The target's default page size.
5284 @end table
5285
5286 So for example:
5287
5288 @smallexample
5289 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5290 @end smallexample
5291
5292 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5293 supported by the target.
5294
5295 @node Symbols
5296 @subsection Symbol Names
5297 @cindex symbol names
5298 @cindex names
5299 @cindex quoted symbol names
5300 @kindex "
5301 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5302 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5303 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5304 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5305 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5306 @smallexample
5307 "SECTION" = 9;
5308 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5309 @end smallexample
5310
5311 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5312 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5313 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5314
5315 @node Orphan Sections
5316 @subsection Orphan Sections
5317 @cindex orphan
5318 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5319 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5320 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5321 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5322 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5323 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5324 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5325 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5326 at the end of the file.
5327
5328 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5329 well as section flag.
5330
5331 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5332 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5333 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5334 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5335 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5336 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5337 character.
5338
5339 @node Location Counter
5340 @subsection The Location Counter
5341 @kindex .
5342 @cindex dot
5343 @cindex location counter
5344 @cindex current output location
5345 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5346 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5347 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5348 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5349 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5350
5351 @cindex holes
5352 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5353 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5354 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5355 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5356 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5357
5358 @smallexample
5359 SECTIONS
5360 @{
5361 output :
5362 @{
5363 file1(.text)
5364 . = . + 1000;
5365 file2(.text)
5366 . += 1000;
5367 file3(.text)
5368 @} = 0x12345678;
5369 @}
5370 @end smallexample
5371 @noindent
5372 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5373 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5374 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5375 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5376 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5377 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5378
5379 @cindex dot inside sections
5380 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5381 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5382 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5383 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5384 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5385 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5386
5387 @smallexample
5388 SECTIONS
5389 @{
5390 . = 0x100
5391 .text: @{
5392 *(.text)
5393 . = 0x200
5394 @}
5395 . = 0x500
5396 .data: @{
5397 *(.data)
5398 . += 0x600
5399 @}
5400 @}
5401 @end smallexample
5402
5403 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5404 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5405 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5406 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5407 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5408 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5409 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5410 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5411
5412 @cindex dot outside sections
5413 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5414 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5415 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5416
5417 @smallexample
5418 SECTIONS
5419 @{
5420 start_of_text = . ;
5421 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5422 end_of_text = . ;
5423
5424 start_of_data = . ;
5425 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5426 end_of_data = . ;
5427 @}
5428 @end smallexample
5429
5430 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5431 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5432 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5433 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5434 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5435 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5436 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5437 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5438 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5439 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5440 as follows:
5441
5442 @smallexample
5443 SECTIONS
5444 @{
5445 start_of_text = . ;
5446 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5447 end_of_text = . ;
5448
5449 start_of_data = . ;
5450 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5451 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5452 end_of_data = . ;
5453 @}
5454 @end smallexample
5455
5456 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5457 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5458 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5459 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5460 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5461 section. So you could write:
5462
5463 @smallexample
5464 SECTIONS
5465 @{
5466 start_of_text = . ;
5467 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5468 end_of_text = . ;
5469
5470 . = . ;
5471 start_of_data = . ;
5472 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5473 end_of_data = . ;
5474 @}
5475 @end smallexample
5476
5477 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5478 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5479
5480 @need 2000
5481 @node Operators
5482 @subsection Operators
5483 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5484 @cindex arithmetic operators
5485 @cindex precedence in expressions
5486 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5487 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5488 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5489 @ifnottex
5490 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5491 @smallexample
5492 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5493 (highest)
5494 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5495 2 left * / %
5496 3 left + -
5497 4 left >> <<
5498 5 left == != > < <= >=
5499 6 left &
5500 7 left |
5501 8 left &&
5502 9 left ||
5503 10 right ? :
5504 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5505 (lowest)
5506 @end smallexample
5507 Notes:
5508 (1) Prefix operators
5509 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5510 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5511 @end ifnottex
5512 @tex
5513 \vskip \baselineskip
5514 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5515 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5516 \hrule
5517 \halign
5518 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5519 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5520 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5521 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5522 \noalign{\hrule}
5523 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5524 &highest&&&&&\cr
5525 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5526 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5527 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5528 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5529 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5530 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5531 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5532 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5533 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5534 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5535 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5536 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5537 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5538 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5539 \hrule}
5540 @end tex
5541 @iftex
5542 {
5543 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5544 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5545 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5546 }
5547 @end iftex
5548 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5549
5550 @node Evaluation
5551 @subsection Evaluation
5552 @cindex lazy evaluation
5553 @cindex expression evaluation order
5554 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5555 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5556
5557 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5558 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5559 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5560 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5561
5562 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5563 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5564 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5565 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5566
5567 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5568 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5569 allocation.
5570
5571 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5572 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5573
5574 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5575 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5576 following
5577 @smallexample
5578 @group
5579 SECTIONS
5580 @{
5581 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5582 @{ *(.text) @}
5583 @}
5584 @end group
5585 @end smallexample
5586 @noindent
5587 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5588 address}.
5589
5590 @node Expression Section
5591 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5592 @cindex expression sections
5593 @cindex absolute expressions
5594 @cindex relative expressions
5595 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5596 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5597 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5598 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5599 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5600 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5601 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5602 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5603 operations.
5604
5605 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5606 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5607 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5608 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5609 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5610 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5611 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5612 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5613 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5614 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5615 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5616 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5617 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5618 everywhere.
5619
5620 In the following simple example,
5621
5622 @smallexample
5623 @group
5624 SECTIONS
5625 @{
5626 . = 0x100;
5627 __executable_start = 0x100;
5628 .data :
5629 @{
5630 . = 0x10;
5631 __data_start = 0x10;
5632 *(.data)
5633 @}
5634 @dots{}
5635 @}
5636 @end group
5637 @end smallexample
5638
5639 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5640 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5641 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5642 section in the second two assignments.
5643
5644 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5645 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5646
5647 @itemize @bullet
5648 @item
5649 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5650 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5651 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5652 @item
5653 Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5654 or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5655 same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5656 address before applying the operator.
5657 @end itemize
5658
5659 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5660
5661 @itemize @bullet
5662 @item
5663 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5664 @item
5665 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5666 @item
5667 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5668 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5669 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5670 @item
5671 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5672 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5673 section as the relative operand(s).
5674 @item
5675 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5676 conversions) is an absolute address.
5677 @end itemize
5678
5679 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5680 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5681 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5682 section @samp{.data}:
5683 @smallexample
5684 SECTIONS
5685 @{
5686 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5687 @}
5688 @end smallexample
5689 @noindent
5690 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5691 @samp{.data} section.
5692
5693 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5694 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5695
5696 @node Builtin Functions
5697 @subsection Builtin Functions
5698 @cindex functions in expressions
5699 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5700 use in linker script expressions.
5701
5702 @table @code
5703 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5704 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5705 @cindex expression, absolute
5706 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5707 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5708 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5709 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5710
5711 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5712 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5713 @cindex section address in expression
5714 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5715 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5716 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5717 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5718 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5719 the other two will be absolute:
5720 @smallexample
5721 @group
5722 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5723 .output1 :
5724 @{
5725 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5726 @dots{}
5727 @}
5728 .output :
5729 @{
5730 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5731 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5732 @}
5733 @dots{} @}
5734 @end group
5735 @end smallexample
5736
5737 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5738 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5739 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5740 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5741 @cindex round up location counter
5742 @cindex align location counter
5743 @cindex round up expression
5744 @cindex align expression
5745 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5746 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5747 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5748 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5749 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5750 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5751
5752 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5753 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5754 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5755 input sections:
5756 @smallexample
5757 @group
5758 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5759 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5760 *(.data)
5761 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5762 @}
5763 @dots{} @}
5764 @end group
5765 @end smallexample
5766 @noindent
5767 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5768 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5769 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5770 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5771
5772 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5773
5774 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5775 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5776 @cindex section alignment
5777 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5778 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5779 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5780 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5781 value in that section.
5782 @smallexample
5783 @group
5784 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5785 .output @{
5786 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5787 @dots{}
5788 @}
5789 @dots{} @}
5790 @end group
5791 @end smallexample
5792
5793 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5794 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5795 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5796 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5797 section.
5798
5799 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5800 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5801 This is equivalent to either
5802 @smallexample
5803 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5804 @end smallexample
5805 or
5806 @smallexample
5807 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5808 @end smallexample
5809 @noindent
5810 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5811 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5812 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5813 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5814 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5815 bytes in the on-disk file.
5816
5817 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5818 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5819 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5820 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5821 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5822
5823 @noindent
5824 Example:
5825 @smallexample
5826 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5827 @end smallexample
5828
5829 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5830 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5831 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5832 evaluation purposes.
5833
5834 @smallexample
5835 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5836 @end smallexample
5837
5838 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5839 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5840 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5841 @samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5842 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5843 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5844 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5845 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5846 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5847 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5848
5849 @smallexample
5850 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5851 @end smallexample
5852
5853 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5854 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5855 @cindex symbol defaults
5856 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5857 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5858 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5859 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5860 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5861 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5862 existed, its value is preserved:
5863
5864 @smallexample
5865 @group
5866 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5867 .text : @{
5868 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5869 @dots{}
5870 @}
5871 @dots{}
5872 @}
5873 @end group
5874 @end smallexample
5875
5876 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5877 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5878 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5879
5880 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5881 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5882 @cindex section load address in expression
5883 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
5884 Section LMA}).
5885
5886 @kindex MAX
5887 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5888 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5889
5890 @kindex MIN
5891 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5892 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5893
5894 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
5895 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5896 @cindex unallocated address, next
5897 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5898 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5899 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5900 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5901
5902 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5903 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5904 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5905
5906 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5907 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5908 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5909 value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5910 option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5911 @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5912 be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5913 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5914 name.
5915
5916 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5917 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5918 @cindex section size
5919 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5920 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5921 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5922 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5923 @smallexample
5924 @group
5925 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5926 .output @{
5927 .start = . ;
5928 @dots{}
5929 .end = . ;
5930 @}
5931 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5932 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5933 @dots{} @}
5934 @end group
5935 @end smallexample
5936
5937 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5938 @itemx sizeof_headers
5939 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5940 @cindex header size
5941 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5942 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5943 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5944 choose, to facilitate paging.
5945
5946 @cindex not enough room for program headers
5947 @cindex program headers, not enough room
5948 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5949 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5950 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5951 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5952 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5953 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5954 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5955 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5956 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5957 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5958 @end table
5959
5960 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
5961 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
5962 @cindex implicit linker scripts
5963 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5964 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5965 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5966 linker will report an error.
5967
5968 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5969
5970 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5971 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5972 commands.
5973
5974 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5975 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5976 read. This can affect archive searching.
5977
5978 @ifset GENERIC
5979 @node Machine Dependent
5980 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
5981
5982 @cindex machine dependencies
5983 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5984 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
5985 functionality are not listed.
5986
5987 @menu
5988 @ifset H8300
5989 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5990 @end ifset
5991 @ifset I960
5992 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5993 @end ifset
5994 @ifset ARM
5995 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5996 @end ifset
5997 @ifset HPPA
5998 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5999 @end ifset
6000 @ifset M68K
6001 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6002 @end ifset
6003 @ifset MMIX
6004 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6005 @end ifset
6006 @ifset MSP430
6007 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6008 @end ifset
6009 @ifset M68HC11
6010 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6011 @end ifset
6012 @ifset POWERPC
6013 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6014 @end ifset
6015 @ifset POWERPC64
6016 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6017 @end ifset
6018 @ifset SPU
6019 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6020 @end ifset
6021 @ifset TICOFF
6022 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6023 @end ifset
6024 @ifset WIN32
6025 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6026 @end ifset
6027 @ifset XTENSA
6028 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6029 @end ifset
6030 @end menu
6031 @end ifset
6032
6033 @ifset H8300
6034 @ifclear GENERIC
6035 @raisesections
6036 @end ifclear
6037
6038 @node H8/300
6039 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6040
6041 @cindex H8/300 support
6042 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6043 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6044
6045 @table @emph
6046 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6047 @item relaxing address modes
6048 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6049 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6050 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6051 respectively.
6052
6053 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6054 @item synthesizing instructions
6055 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
6056 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6057 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6058 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6059 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6060 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6061 top page of memory).
6062
6063 @item bit manipulation instructions
6064 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6065 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6066 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6067 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6068 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6069 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6070 the top page of memory).
6071
6072 @item system control instructions
6073 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6074 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6075 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6076 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6077 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6078 the top page of memory).
6079 @end table
6080
6081 @ifclear GENERIC
6082 @lowersections
6083 @end ifclear
6084 @end ifset
6085
6086 @ifclear GENERIC
6087 @ifset Renesas
6088 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6089 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6090 @node Renesas
6091 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6092
6093 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6094 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6095 options are required for these chips.
6096 @end ifset
6097 @end ifclear
6098
6099 @ifset I960
6100 @ifclear GENERIC
6101 @raisesections
6102 @end ifclear
6103
6104 @node i960
6105 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6106
6107 @cindex i960 support
6108
6109 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6110 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6111 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6112 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6113 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6114 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6115 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6116
6117 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6118 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6119 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6120 the names
6121
6122 @smallexample
6123 @group
6124 try
6125 libtry.a
6126 tryca
6127 libtryca.a
6128 @end group
6129 @end smallexample
6130
6131 @noindent
6132 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6133 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6134
6135 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6136 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6137 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6138 specifies a library.
6139
6140 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6141 @cindex relaxing on i960
6142 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6143 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6144 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6145 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6146 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6147 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6148 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6149 not itself call any subroutines).
6150
6151 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6152 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6153 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6154 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6155
6156 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6157
6158 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6159 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6160 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6161
6162 @ifclear GENERIC
6163 @lowersections
6164 @end ifclear
6165 @end ifset
6166
6167 @ifset ARM
6168 @ifclear GENERIC
6169 @raisesections
6170 @end ifclear
6171
6172 @ifset M68HC11
6173 @ifclear GENERIC
6174 @raisesections
6175 @end ifclear
6176
6177 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6178 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6179
6180 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6181
6182 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6183
6184 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6185 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6186
6187 @table @emph
6188 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6189 @item relaxing address modes
6190 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6191 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6192 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6193 respectively.
6194
6195 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6196 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6197 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6198
6199 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6200 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6201 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6202 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6203 @code{bset} instructions.
6204
6205 @end table
6206
6207 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6208
6209 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6210 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6211 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6212 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6213 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6214 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6215 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6216 point to the function trampoline.
6217
6218 @ifclear GENERIC
6219 @lowersections
6220 @end ifclear
6221 @end ifset
6222
6223 @node ARM
6224 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6225
6226 @cindex ARM interworking support
6227 @kindex --support-old-code
6228 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6229 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6230 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6231 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6232 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6233 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6234 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6235 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6236 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6237 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6238
6239 @cindex thumb entry point
6240 @cindex entry point, thumb
6241 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6242 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6243 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6244 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6245 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6246 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6247
6248 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6249 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6250 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6251 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6252 elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6253 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6254
6255 @cindex BE8
6256 @kindex --be8
6257 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6258 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6259 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6260
6261 @cindex TARGET1
6262 @kindex --target1-rel
6263 @kindex --target1-abs
6264 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6265 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6266 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6267 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6268
6269 @cindex TARGET2
6270 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6271 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6272 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6273 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6274 @table @samp
6275 @item rel
6276 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6277 @item abs
6278 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6279 @item got-rel
6280 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6281 @end table
6282
6283 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6284 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6285 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6286 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6287 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6288 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6289
6290 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6291 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6292 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6293
6294 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6295 relocations are ignored.
6296
6297 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6298 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6299 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6300 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6301
6302 @smallexample
6303 TST rM, #1
6304 MOVEQ PC, rM
6305 BX Rn
6306 @end smallexample
6307
6308 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6309 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6310 condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6311
6312 @cindex USE_BLX
6313 @kindex --use-blx
6314 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6315 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6316 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6317 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6318 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6319
6320 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6321 specify it if you are using that target.
6322
6323 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6324 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6325 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6326 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6327 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6328 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6329 the support code can read the intended values.
6330
6331 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6332 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6333 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6334 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6335 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6336 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6337
6338 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6339 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6340 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6341 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6342 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6343 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6344
6345 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6346 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6347 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6348 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6349 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6350 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6351 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6352
6353 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6354 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6355 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6356 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6357 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6358 are targetting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6359 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6360
6361 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6362 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentaion website at:
6363 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6364
6365 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6366 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6367 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6368 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6369 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6370 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6371 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6372 not be diagnosed.
6373
6374 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6375 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6376 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6377 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6378 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6379 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6380 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6381
6382 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6383 @kindex --pic-veneer
6384 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6385 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6386 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6387 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6388
6389 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6390 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6391 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6392 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6393 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6394 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6395 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6396 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6397 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6398 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6399 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6400 where they should be placed.
6401
6402 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6403 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6404 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6405 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6406 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6407 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6408 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6409 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6410 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6411 from the input sections.
6412
6413 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6414 @samp{N = +1}.
6415
6416 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6417 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6418 otherwise.
6419
6420 @ifclear GENERIC
6421 @lowersections
6422 @end ifclear
6423 @end ifset
6424
6425 @ifset HPPA
6426 @ifclear GENERIC
6427 @raisesections
6428 @end ifclear
6429
6430 @node HPPA ELF32
6431 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6432 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6433 @kindex --multi-subspace
6434 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6435 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6436 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6437 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6438 multiple sub-spaces.
6439
6440 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6441 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6442 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6443 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6444 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6445 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6446 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6447 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6448 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6449 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6450 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6451 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6452 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6453 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6454 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6455 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6456
6457 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6458 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6459 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6460 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6461
6462 @ifclear GENERIC
6463 @lowersections
6464 @end ifclear
6465 @end ifset
6466
6467 @ifset M68K
6468 @ifclear GENERIC
6469 @raisesections
6470 @end ifclear
6471
6472 @node M68K
6473 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6474
6475 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6476 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6477 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6478 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6479 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6480 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6481 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6482 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6483 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6484 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6485 support such GOTs.
6486 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6487 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6488 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6489 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6490
6491 @ifclear GENERIC
6492 @lowersections
6493 @end ifclear
6494 @end ifset
6495
6496 @ifset MMIX
6497 @ifclear GENERIC
6498 @raisesections
6499 @end ifclear
6500
6501 @node MMIX
6502 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6503 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6504 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6505 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6506 can translate between the two formats.
6507
6508 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6509 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6510 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6511 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6512 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6513 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6514 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6515 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6516
6517 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6518 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6519 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6520 of a section.
6521
6522 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6523 are left out from an mmo file.
6524
6525 @ifclear GENERIC
6526 @lowersections
6527 @end ifclear
6528 @end ifset
6529
6530 @ifset MSP430
6531 @ifclear GENERIC
6532 @raisesections
6533 @end ifclear
6534
6535 @node MSP430
6536 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6537 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6538 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6539 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6540
6541 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6542 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6543
6544 @table @code
6545 @item @samp{.vectors}
6546 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6547
6548 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6549 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6550 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6551
6552 @item @samp{.infomem}
6553 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6554 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6555
6556 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6557 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6558 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6559
6560 @item @samp{.noinit}
6561 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6562
6563 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6564 @end table
6565
6566 @ifclear GENERIC
6567 @lowersections
6568 @end ifclear
6569 @end ifset
6570
6571 @ifset POWERPC
6572 @ifclear GENERIC
6573 @raisesections
6574 @end ifclear
6575
6576 @node PowerPC ELF32
6577 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6578 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6579 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6580 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6581 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6582 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6583 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6584 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6585 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6586 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6587 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6588 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6589 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6590
6591 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6592 @table @option
6593 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6594 @kindex --bss-plt
6595 @item --bss-plt
6596 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6597 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6598 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6599 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6600 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6601 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6602 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6603 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6604
6605 @kindex --secure-plt
6606 @item --secure-plt
6607 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6608 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6609 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6610 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6611 style BSS PLT.
6612
6613 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6614 @kindex --sdata-got
6615 @item --sdata-got
6616 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6617 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6618 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6619 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6620 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6621 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6622 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6623 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6624 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6625 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6626 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6627 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6628
6629 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6630 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6631 @item --emit-stub-syms
6632 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6633 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6634
6635 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6636 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6637 @item --no-tls-optimize
6638 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6639 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6640 disable the optimization.
6641 @end table
6642
6643 @ifclear GENERIC
6644 @lowersections
6645 @end ifclear
6646 @end ifset
6647
6648 @ifset POWERPC64
6649 @ifclear GENERIC
6650 @raisesections
6651 @end ifclear
6652
6653 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6654 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6655
6656 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6657 @table @option
6658 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6659 @kindex --stub-group-size
6660 @item --stub-group-size
6661 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6662 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6663 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6664 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6665 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6666 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6667 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6668 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6669 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6670 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6671 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6672 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6673 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6674 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6675
6676 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6677 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6678 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6679 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6680
6681 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6682 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6683 @item --emit-stub-syms
6684 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6685 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6686
6687 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6688 @kindex --dotsyms
6689 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6690 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6691 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6692 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6693 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6694 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6695 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6696 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6697 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6698 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6699 feature.
6700
6701 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6702 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6703 @item --no-tls-optimize
6704 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6705 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6706 disable the optimization.
6707
6708 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6709 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6710 @item --no-opd-optimize
6711 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6712 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6713 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6714 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6715
6716 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6717 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6718 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6719 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6720 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6721 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6722 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6723
6724 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6725 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6726 @item --no-toc-optimize
6727 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6728 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6729 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6730 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6731 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6732 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6733 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6734 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6735 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6736 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6737 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6738 optimization.
6739
6740 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6741 @kindex --no-multi-toc
6742 @item --no-multi-toc
6743 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6744 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6745 where TOC
6746 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6747 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6748 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6749 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6750 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6751 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
6752 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6753 Use this option to turn off this feature.
6754
6755 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6756 @kindex --no-toc-sort
6757 @item --no-toc-sort
6758 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6759 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6760 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6761 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6762 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6763 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6764 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6765 off this feature.
6766
6767 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6768 @kindex --plt-align
6769 @kindex --no-plt-align
6770 @item --plt-align
6771 @itemx --no-plt-align
6772 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6773 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6774 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6775 are packed tightly.
6776
6777 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6778 @kindex --plt-static-chain
6779 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6780 @item --plt-static-chain
6781 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6782 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6783 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6784 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6785
6786 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6787 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
6788 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6789 @item --plt-thread-safe
6790 @itemx --no-thread-safe
6791 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6792 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6793 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6794 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6795 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6796 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6797 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6798 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6799 default behaviour.
6800 @end table
6801
6802 @ifclear GENERIC
6803 @lowersections
6804 @end ifclear
6805 @end ifset
6806
6807 @ifset SPU
6808 @ifclear GENERIC
6809 @raisesections
6810 @end ifclear
6811
6812 @node SPU ELF
6813 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6814
6815 @cindex SPU ELF options
6816 @table @option
6817
6818 @cindex SPU plugins
6819 @kindex --plugin
6820 @item --plugin
6821 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6822
6823 @cindex SPU overlays
6824 @kindex --no-overlays
6825 @item --no-overlays
6826 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6827 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6828 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6829 turns off all this special overlay handling.
6830
6831 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6832 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6833 @item --emit-stub-syms
6834 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6835 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6836
6837 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6838 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6839 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
6840 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6841 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6842 on calls to non-overlay regions.
6843
6844 @cindex SPU local store size
6845 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6846 @item --local-store=lo:hi
6847 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6848 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6849 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6850
6851 @cindex SPU
6852 @kindex --stack-analysis
6853 @item --stack-analysis
6854 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6855 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6856 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6857 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6858 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6859 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6860 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6861 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6862 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6863 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6864 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6865 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6866 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6867 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6868 and calls will be given.
6869
6870 @cindex SPU
6871 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
6872 @item --emit-stack-syms
6873 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6874 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6875 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6876 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6877 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6878 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6879 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
6880 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
6881 @end table
6882
6883 @ifclear GENERIC
6884 @lowersections
6885 @end ifclear
6886 @end ifset
6887
6888 @ifset TICOFF
6889 @ifclear GENERIC
6890 @raisesections
6891 @end ifclear
6892
6893 @node TI COFF
6894 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6895 @cindex TI COFF versions
6896 @kindex --format=@var{version}
6897 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6898 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6899 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6900 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6901 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6902
6903 @ifclear GENERIC
6904 @lowersections
6905 @end ifclear
6906 @end ifset
6907
6908 @ifset WIN32
6909 @ifclear GENERIC
6910 @raisesections
6911 @end ifclear
6912
6913 @node WIN32
6914 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6915
6916 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
6917 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
6918 command line options mentioned here.
6919
6920 @table @emph
6921 @cindex import libraries
6922 @item import libraries
6923 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
6924 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
6925 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6926 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
6927 support for creating such libraries provided with the
6928 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6929
6930 @item exporting DLL symbols
6931 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
6932 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6933
6934 @table @emph
6935 @item using auto-export functionality
6936 @cindex using auto-export functionality
6937 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6938 which is controlled by the following command line options:
6939
6940 @itemize
6941 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6942 @item --exclude-symbols
6943 @item --exclude-libs
6944 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
6945 @item --version-script
6946 @end itemize
6947
6948 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6949 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6950 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6951 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6952 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6953 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6954 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6955 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6956
6957 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
6958 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6959 if either of the following are true:
6960
6961 @itemize
6962 @item A DEF file is used.
6963 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6964 @end itemize
6965
6966 @item using a DEF file
6967 @cindex using a DEF file
6968 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6969 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6970 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6971 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
6972 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
6973
6974 @example
6975 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6976 @end example
6977
6978 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6979 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6980
6981 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6982
6983 @example
6984 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
6985
6986 EXPORTS
6987 foo
6988 bar
6989 _bar = bar
6990 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6991 var1 DATA
6992 doo = foo == foo2
6993 eoo DATA == var1
6994 @end example
6995
6996 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
6997 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6998 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6999 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7000 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7001 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7002 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7003 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7004 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7005
7006 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7007 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7008 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7009
7010 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7011 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7012 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7013 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7014
7015 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7016 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7017 non-default base address for the image.
7018
7019 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7020 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7021 filename specified on the command line.
7022
7023 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7024
7025 @example
7026 EXPORTS
7027 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7028 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7029 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7030 @end example
7031
7032 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7033 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7034 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7035 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7036 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7037 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7038 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7039
7040 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7041
7042 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7043 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7044 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7045 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7046 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7047
7048 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7049 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7050 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7051 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7052
7053 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7054 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7055 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7056 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7057 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7058 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7059 application will behave unexpectedly.
7060
7061 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7062 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7063 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7064 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7065 the DLL without an import library.
7066
7067 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7068 other DEF file statements
7069
7070 @cindex creating a DEF file
7071 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7072 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7073
7074 @item Using decorations
7075 @cindex Using decorations
7076 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7077 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7078 declared as:
7079
7080 @example
7081 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7082 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7083 @end example
7084
7085 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7086 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7087 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7088 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7089
7090 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7091 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7092 instead:
7093
7094 @example
7095 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7096 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7097 @end example
7098
7099 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7100 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7101 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7102 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7103 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7104 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7105 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7106 information.
7107 @end table
7108
7109 @cindex automatic data imports
7110 @item automatic data imports
7111 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7112 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7113 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7114 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7115 code to these platforms, especially for large
7116 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7117 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7118 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7119 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7120 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7121 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7122 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7123 trigger the feature's use.
7124
7125 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7126 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7127
7128 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7129 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7130
7131 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7132 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7133 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7134 below.
7135
7136 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7137 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7138 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7139 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7140 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7141 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7142 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7143 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7144 references.
7145
7146 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7147 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7148 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7149 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7150 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7151 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7152 run without error on an older system.
7153
7154 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7155 enabled as needed.
7156
7157 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7158 @item direct linking to a dll
7159 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7160 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7161 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7162 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7163 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7164 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7165 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7166 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7167 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7168 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7169
7170 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7171 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7172 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7173 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7174 select the dll instead of an import library.
7175
7176
7177 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7178 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7179
7180 @example
7181 libxxx.dll.a
7182 xxx.dll.a
7183 libxxx.a
7184 xxx.lib
7185 cygxxx.dll (*)
7186 libxxx.dll
7187 xxx.dll
7188 @end example
7189
7190 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7191
7192 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7193 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7194 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7195 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7196 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7197
7198 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7199 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7200 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7201 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7202 could coexist on the same machine.
7203
7204 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7205 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7206 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7207
7208 @example
7209 bin/
7210 cygxxx.dll
7211 lib/
7212 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7213 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7214 @end example
7215
7216 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7217 done two ways:
7218
7219 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7220 @example
7221 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7222 @end example
7223
7224 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7225 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7226 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7227 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7228
7229 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7230 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7231 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7232 making the app/dll.
7233
7234 @example
7235 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7236 @end example
7237
7238 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7239
7240 @example
7241 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7242 @end example
7243
7244 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7245 perfectly legal
7246
7247 @example
7248 bin/
7249 cygxxx-5.dll
7250 lib/
7251 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7252 @end example
7253
7254 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7255 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7256 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7257
7258 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7259 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7260
7261 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7262 work with auto-imported data.
7263
7264 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7265 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7266 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7267 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7268 possible to do this without an import lib.
7269
7270 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7271 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7272 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7273 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7274
7275 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7276 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7277 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7278 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7279 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7280 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7281 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7282
7283 @item symbol aliasing
7284 @table @emph
7285 @item adding additional names
7286 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7287 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7288 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7289 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7290 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7291
7292 @example
7293 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7294
7295 EXPORTS
7296 foo
7297 _foo = foo
7298 @end example
7299
7300 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7301
7302 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7303 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7304
7305 @example
7306 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7307 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7308 @end example
7309
7310 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7311 symbols.
7312
7313 @item renaming symbols
7314 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7315 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7316 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7317 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7318 created). In the following example:
7319
7320 @example
7321 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7322
7323 EXPORTS
7324 _foo = foo
7325 @end example
7326
7327 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7328 @samp{_foo}.
7329 @end table
7330
7331 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7332 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7333 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7334 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7335 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7336 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7337 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7338 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7339 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7340 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7341 which is probably not what you wanted.
7342
7343 @cindex weak externals
7344 @item weak externals
7345 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7346 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7347 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7348 are three variants of weak externals:
7349 @itemize
7350 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7351 called lazy externals.
7352 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7353 This form is not presently implemented.
7354 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7355 implemented.
7356 @end itemize
7357 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7358 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7359 uses a default value.
7360
7361 @cindex aligned common symbols
7362 @item aligned common symbols
7363 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7364 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7365 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7366 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7367 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7368 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7369 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7370 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7371 @end table
7372
7373 @ifclear GENERIC
7374 @lowersections
7375 @end ifclear
7376 @end ifset
7377
7378 @ifset XTENSA
7379 @ifclear GENERIC
7380 @raisesections
7381 @end ifclear
7382
7383 @node Xtensa
7384 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7385
7386 @cindex Xtensa processors
7387 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7388 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7389 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7390 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7391 example, with the command:
7392
7393 @smallexample
7394 SECTIONS
7395 @{
7396 .text : @{
7397 *(.literal .text)
7398 @}
7399 @}
7400 @end smallexample
7401
7402 @noindent
7403 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7404 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7405 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7406 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7407 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7408 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7409 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7410
7411 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7412 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7413 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7414 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7415 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7416 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7417 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7418 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7419 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7420 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7421 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7422 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7423
7424 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7425 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7426 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7427 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7428 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7429 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7430 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7431 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7432 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7433 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7434 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7435 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7436 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7437 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7438
7439 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7440 control the linker:
7441
7442 @cindex Xtensa options
7443 @table @option
7444 @item --size-opt
7445 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7446 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7447 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7448 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7449 preserve the correctness of the code.
7450 @end table
7451
7452 @ifclear GENERIC
7453 @lowersections
7454 @end ifclear
7455 @end ifset
7456
7457 @ifclear SingleFormat
7458 @node BFD
7459 @chapter BFD
7460
7461 @cindex back end
7462 @cindex object file management
7463 @cindex object formats available
7464 @kindex objdump -i
7465 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7466 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7467 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7468 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7469 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7470 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7471 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7472 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7473 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7474
7475 @cindex BFD requirements
7476 @cindex requirements for BFD
7477 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7478 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7479 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7480 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7481 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7482 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7483 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7484
7485 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7486 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7487 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7488 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7489
7490 @menu
7491 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7492 @end menu
7493
7494 @node BFD outline
7495 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7496 @cindex opening object files
7497 @include bfdsumm.texi
7498 @end ifclear
7499
7500 @node Reporting Bugs
7501 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7502 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7503 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7504
7505 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7506
7507 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7508 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7509 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7510 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7511 @command{ld}.
7512
7513 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7514 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7515
7516 @menu
7517 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7518 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7519 @end menu
7520
7521 @node Bug Criteria
7522 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7523 @cindex bug criteria
7524
7525 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7526
7527 @itemize @bullet
7528 @cindex fatal signal
7529 @cindex linker crash
7530 @cindex crash of linker
7531 @item
7532 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7533 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7534
7535 @cindex error on valid input
7536 @item
7537 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7538
7539 @cindex invalid input
7540 @item
7541 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7542 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7543 object files are correct.
7544
7545 @item
7546 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7547 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7548 @end itemize
7549
7550 @node Bug Reporting
7551 @section How to Report Bugs
7552 @cindex bug reports
7553 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7554
7555 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7556 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7557 recommend you contact that organization first.
7558
7559 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7560 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7561 distribution.
7562
7563 @ifset BUGURL
7564 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7565 @value{BUGURL}.
7566 @end ifset
7567
7568 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7569 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7570 fact or leave it out, state it!
7571
7572 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7573 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7574 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7575 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7576 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7577 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7578 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7579 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7580 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7581 and the most helpful.
7582
7583 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7584 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7585 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7586
7587 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7588 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7589 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7590 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7591
7592 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7593
7594 @itemize @bullet
7595 @item
7596 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7597 the @samp{--version} argument.
7598
7599 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7600 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7601
7602 @item
7603 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7604 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7605
7606 @item
7607 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7608 version number.
7609
7610 @item
7611 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7612 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7613
7614 @item
7615 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7616 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7617 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7618 sufficient.
7619
7620 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7621 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7622
7623 @item
7624 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7625 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7626 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7627 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7628 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7629 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7630 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7631 attachments are best.
7632
7633 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7634 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7635 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7636 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7637 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7638
7639 @item
7640 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7641 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7642
7643 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7644 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7645 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7646 a chance to make a mistake.
7647
7648 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7649 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7650 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7651 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7652 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7653 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7654 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7655 any conclusion from our observations.
7656
7657 @item
7658 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7659 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7660 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7661 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7662 context, not by line number.
7663
7664 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7665 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7666 @end itemize
7667
7668 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7669
7670 @itemize @bullet
7671 @item
7672 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7673
7674 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7675 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7676 changes will not affect it.
7677
7678 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7679 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7680 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7681 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7682
7683 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7684 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7685 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7686 less time, and so on.
7687
7688 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7689 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7690
7691 @item
7692 A patch for the bug.
7693
7694 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7695 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7696 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7697 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7698
7699 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7700 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7701 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7702 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7703 fixed.
7704
7705 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7706 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7707 help us to understand.
7708
7709 @item
7710 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7711
7712 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7713 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7714 @end itemize
7715
7716 @node MRI
7717 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7718 @cindex MRI compatibility
7719 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7720 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7721 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7722 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7723 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7724 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7725 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7726
7727 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7728 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7729 features to make use of them.
7730
7731 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7732 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7733
7734 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7735 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7736 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
7737 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7738 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7739
7740 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7741
7742 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7743 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7744 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7745
7746 @table @code
7747 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7748 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7749 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7750 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7751 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7752 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7753 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7754 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7755 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7756 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7757 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7758
7759 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7760 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7761 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7762 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7763
7764 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7765
7766 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7767 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7768 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7769 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
7770
7771 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7772 @item BASE @var{expression}
7773 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7774 absolute addresses) in the output file.
7775
7776 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7777 @item CHIP @var{expression}
7778 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7779 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7780
7781 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7782 @item END
7783 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7784
7785 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7786 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7787 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
7788 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
7789
7790 @enumerate
7791 @item
7792 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7793
7794 @item
7795 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7796
7797 @item
7798 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7799 @samp{COFF}
7800 @end enumerate
7801
7802 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7803 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7804 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
7805 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
7806
7807 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7808 same line, with no change in its effect.
7809
7810 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7811 @item LOAD @var{filename}
7812 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7813 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
7814 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
7815 command line.
7816
7817 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7818 @item NAME @var{output-name}
7819 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
7820 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7821 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7822
7823 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7824 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7825 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
7826 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
7827 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7828 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7829 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7830 file, in the order specified.
7831
7832 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7833 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7834 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7835 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7836 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7837 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
7838
7839 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7840 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7841 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7842 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7843 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7844 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7845 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7846 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7847 @end table
7848
7849 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7850 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7851 @include fdl.texi
7852
7853 @node LD Index
7854 @unnumbered LD Index
7855
7856 @printindex cp
7857
7858 @tex
7859 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7860 % meantime:
7861 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7862 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7863 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7864 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7865 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7866 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7867 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7868 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7869 \page\colophon
7870 % Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7871 @end tex
7872
7873 @bye
This page took 0.182872 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.